Kyocera TASKalfa 3051ci Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Kyocera Manuals
  4. Copier
  5. TASKalfa 3051ci
  6. Service manual
Kyocera TASKalfa 3051ci Service Manual

Kyocera TASKalfa 3051ci Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for TASKalfa 3051ci:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
Table Of Contents
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
TASKalfa 3051ci
TASKalfa 3551ci
TASKalfa 4551ci
TASKalfa 5551ci
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in May 2014
Rev. 6

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the TASKalfa 3051ci and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Kyocera TASKalfa 3051ci

Summary of Contents for Kyocera TASKalfa 3051ci

  • Page 1 TASKalfa 3051ci TASKalfa 3551ci TASKalfa 4551ci TASKalfa 5551ci SERVICE MANUAL Published in May 2014 Rev. 6...
  • Page 2 Notation of products in the manual For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and black and white modes. TASKalfa 3051ci: 30 ppm model TASKalfa 3551ci: 35 ppm model TASKalfa 4551ci: 45 ppm model...

  • Page 3: Revision History

    Revision history Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks May 13, 2013 Contents,1-2-24,1-2-50,1-2-86,1-2-95,1-3-5,1-3-11, 1-3-17,1-3-26,1-3-29,1-3-69,1-3-89,1-3-104,1-3-114 to 1-3-119,1-3-188,1-3-204,1-3-224,1-3-225,1-4-5, 1-4-23,1-4-29,1-4-39,1-4-154,1-4-162,1-4-168, 1-4-191,1-4-195,1-4-275,1-5-13,1-5-30 to 1-5-32, 1-5-39,1-5-55,1-5-58,1-5-77 to 1-5-79,1-5-81, 1-5-106 to 1-5-108,1-6-1,1-6-2,2-1-5 to 2-1-7,2-2-4, 2-2-5,2-2-10, 2-2-11,2-3-68,2-3-69,2-3-74,2-3-83, 2-3-84,2-4-5 to 2-4-7,2-4-15,2-4-18,2-4-19,2-4-25 to 2-4-27,2-4-29,2-4-30 August 1-1-2,1-1-3,1-2-2,1-2-4,1-2-5,1-2-7,1-2-19 to 1-2-21, 2, 2013 1-3-10,1-3-110,1-3-112,1-3-190,1-3-193,1-3-204, 1-3-219,1-3-228,1-4-26,1-4-89 to 1-4-92,1-5-20, 1-5-58,1-5-80,1-5-106,1-6-2,2-4-6 October...
  • Page 4 This page is intentionally left blank.

  • Page 5: Safety Precautions

    Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

  • Page 6: Safety Warnings And Precautions

    Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below: DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

  • Page 7: Installation Precautions

    1. Installation Precautions WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current...................... •...

  • Page 8: Precautions For Maintenance

    2. Precautions for Maintenance WARNING • Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly....• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures............................• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits.
  • Page 9 • Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement....... • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself......................•...
  • Page 10 This page is intentionally left blank.
  • Page 11 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 CONTENTS 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications ........................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names ........................1-1-15 (1) Machine .......................... 1-1-15 (2) Option ..........................1-1-17 (3) Operation panel ......................1-1-19 1-1-3 Machine cross section ......................1-1-20 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment......................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation..................... 1-2-2 (1) Installation procedure .......................
  • Page 12 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller)................1-4-42 (4) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 2 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller)................
  • Page 13 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 (9) Uneven density horizontally..................1-4-268 (10) Black or color dots appear on the image..............1-4-268 (11) Offset occurs........................ 1-4-269 (12) Part of Image is missing....................1-4-270 (13) Image is out of focus....................1-4-270 (14) Poor grayscale reproducibility..................1-4-271 (15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.
  • Page 14 (1) Precautions........................1-5-1 (2) Drum..........................1-5-1 (3) Toner ..........................1-5-1 (4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container..............1-5-2 1-5-2 Outer covers .......................... 1-5-3 (1) Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover ..............1-5-3 (2) Detaching and refitting the rear lower cover..............1-5-3 (3) Detaching and refitting the left upper cover..............

  • Page 15: Mechanical Construction

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (5) Error symptom at an erroneous insertion of the engine PWB FFC ........ 1-5-83 (6) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB.............. 1-5-84 (7) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 ............. 1-5-87 (8) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 ............. 1-5-88 (9) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB ..............
  • Page 16 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Main PWB..........................2-3-1 2-3-2 Engine PWB ........................2-3-10 2-3-3 Power source PWB ......................2-3-36 2-3-4 IH PWB ..........................2-3-40 (1) 120V model ........................2-3-40 (2) 220-240V model ......................2-3-42 2-3-5 ISC PWB ..........................2-3-44 2-3-6 Operation PWB 1.........................

  • Page 17: Specifications

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications Common functions Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm Type Desktop Printing method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system Cassette 60 to 220 g/m 60 to 256 g/m Paper weight MP tray 60 to 300 g/m Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Cassette...
  • Page 18 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm Light source Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Photoconductor a-Si (drum diameter 30 mm) Image write system Semiconductor laser Charging system Charger roller Touch down developing system Developing system Developer: 2-component Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container...
  • Page 19 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm 120 V AC, 60 Hz, more than 12.0 A Rated input 220 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, more than 7.2 A Document processor, Original cover, Paper feeder, Large capacity feeder, Side deck, Side multi tray*, Side paper feeder*, Side large capacity feeder*, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Center-folding unit, Mailbox, Punch unit, Inner job separator, 100-sheets inner job separator, Right job...

  • Page 20: Copy Functions

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Copy functions Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm : 30 ppm : 35 ppm : 45 ppm : 55 ppm Letter : 30 ppm Letter : 35 ppm Letter : 45 ppm Letter : 55 ppm : 21 ppm : 24 ppm : 31 ppm...

  • Page 21: Printer Functions

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Printer functions Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm : 30 ppm : 35 ppm : 45 ppm : 55 ppm Letter : 30 ppm Letter : 35 ppm Letter : 45 ppm Letter : 55 ppm : 15 ppm : 17 ppm : 22 ppm...

  • Page 22: Scanner Functions

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Scanner functions Specifications Item 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm CPU: Celeron 600 MHz or higher System requirements RAM: 300 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi File format PDF (high compressive, encrypted, PDF/A), JPEG, TIFF, XPS Scanning speed...

  • Page 23: Paper Feeder (500-Sheet X 2) (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option) Item Specifications Feed & reverse roller method Paper Supply Method (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m , 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m , 2 cas- settes) A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Paper Size Letter-R,Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 ×...

  • Page 24: Side Feeder (500-Sheet X 3) (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) (Option) Item Specifications Feed & reverse roller method Paper Supply Method (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m , 3 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m , 3 cas- settes) A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Let- Paper Size ter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 ×...

  • Page 25: Side Feeder (3,000-Sheet) (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) Item Specifications Feed & reverse roller method Paper Supply Method (No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m /No. Sheets: 3,500 64 g/m Paper Size A4, B5, Letter Paper 60 to 300 g/m weight Supported Paper Media Plain, Recycled, Thick, Veiium types Dimensions 12 41/64 ×...

  • Page 26: 1,000-Sheet Finisher (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) Item Specifications Type Floor model Number of trays Two trays Paper weight 45 to 300 g/m A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm, Main Try Statement-R, Executive, Foolscap, A3 Wide (310 ×433 mm), Led- (Try A) ger Wide (310 ×440 mm), 12 ×...

  • Page 27: 4,000-Sheet Finisher (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) Item Specifications Type Floor model Number of trays Three tray Paper weight 45 to 300 g/m A3, B4, B5R,Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", 8K: 1500 sheets Main Try A4, A4R, B5, Letter, LetterR,16K,16KR,Folio, Custom (98 × 148 (Try A) mm to 297 ×...

  • Page 28: Mail Box (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Mail box (option) Item Specifications Number of trays 7 trays A3, B4, Ledger: 50 sheets A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Legal, Letter, Letter R, 216 × 340 mm, Paper size (80 g/m Executive, Folio, Foolscap, 8K,16K, 16K-R, Statement R, Oficio II: 100 sheets 510 x 400 x 470 mm Dimensions (W ×...

  • Page 29: Inner Job Separator (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Inner Job Separator (Option) Item Specifications Number of trays 1 tray Maximum Sheets 30 sheets ( 80 g/m A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Paper Size Executive, Executive-R, Foolscap, Oficio II, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 ×...

  • Page 30: Right Job Separator (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Right Job Separator (Option) Item Specifications Number of trays 1 tray A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, B5-R, A5-R, Executive, Executive-R, Statement-R, 16K, 16K-R,: 70 sheets (80 g/m Maximum Sheets A3, B4, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Foolscap, Oficio II,16K, 8K, 216 × 340mm : 30 sheets (80 g/m A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Paper Size...

  • Page 31: Parts Names

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-1-2 Parts names (1) Machine Figure 1-1-1 1. Original size indicator plate 11. Cleaning Brush 2. Slit glass 12. Release button 3. Toner container K 13. Waste toner box 4. Toner container M 14. Waste toner tray 5. Toner container C 15.
  • Page 32 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Figure 1-1-2 21. Inner tray 31. Duplex cover lever 22. USB port 32. Duplex cover 23. Cassettes 1 33. MP paper width guide 24. Cassettes 2 34. MP support Tray 25. Paper length guide 35. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray 26. Guide lock lever 36.
  • Page 33 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Option 10-b 10-a Figure 1-1-3 1. Machine 8. Side multi tray 2. Document processor (dual scan DP) Cassette 5 3. Document processor (reversed DP) 9. Side paper feeder 4. Original cover a: Cassette 6 5. Paper feeder b: Cassette 7 10.
  • Page 34 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Figure 1-1-4 15. Printing system 22. Wire-less interface kit Software option 16. Printed document guard kit 23. Key counter 1. Data Security Kit 17. Keyboard holder 24. Document table 2. Internet FAX Kit 18. IC card reader holder 3. Card Authentication Kit 19.

  • Page 35: Operation Panel

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Operation panel 14 15 16 17 19 20 24 25 26 27 Figure 1-1-5 1. Status/Job cancel key 11. Main power indicator 21. Memory indicator 2. System menu key 12. Help key 22. Attention indicator 3. Counter key 13.

  • Page 36: Machine Cross Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-1-3 Machine cross section Paper Path Figure 1-1-6 1. Cassette paper feed section 8. Drum unit C 15. Primary transfer section 2. MP tray paper feed section 9. Drum unit Y 16. Secondary transfer/Separa- 3. Paper conveying section 10. Developer unit K tion sections 4.

  • Page 37: Installation Environment

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment 1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F (But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).) 2. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH (But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.) *: Use coated paper at a temperature of 80.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.

  • Page 38: Unpacking And Installation

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation (1) Installation procedure Start Installing the original platen or DP (option) Unpacking Removing the eject spacer Installing other optional devices Installing the cassette heater (option) Removing the tapes Installing the paper feeder (option) Connect the power cord Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Setup for adjusting images Setting the maintenance item U952...
  • Page 39 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Moving the machine When moving the machine, pull out three carrying handles, and move with carrying handles and the hand- hold. Carrying Handhold handle Carrying Carrying handle handle (Handhold at the right front) Figure 1-2-2 <Allowable angle of the right The handhold at the right front side *: Use the handhold at the right front only front handhold positions>...
  • Page 40 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Unpacking 230V model 16,17, 18,19,20 Figure 1-2-4 1. Machine 10. Bottom rear left pad 19. Operation panel sheets 2. Outer case 11. Bottom rear right pad 20. Operation guide etc. 3. Inner case 12. Rear pad 21. Eject spacer 4.
  • Page 41 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 120V model 12,13, 14,15,16 Figure 1-2-5 1. Machine 13. Paper size plates 2. Outer case 14. Paper media plates 3. Inner case 15. Operation panel sheets 4. Side stays 16. Operation guide etc. 5. Skid 17. Eject spacer 6. Bottom pad 18.
  • Page 42 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Removing the eject spacer 1. Remove the eject spacer and silica gel from the eject section. Waste toner box Eject spacer Silica gel Figure 1-2-6 Removing the tapes 1. Remove two tapes and then remove Protect sheet three protect sheets. Tape *: If the spacer is attached: Remove the tape and then remove the...
  • Page 43 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 2. Remove the tape and then remove the Tape A2 paper ISU lock leaflet. Tape 3. Remove two tapes and then remove ISU lock A2 paper. leaflet Tape 4. Remove four tapes and then remove Protect sheet three protect sheets. 5.
  • Page 44 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Pull the cassette 2 forward. 8. Remove two tapes. Cassette 2 Figure 1-2-10 9. Pull the cassette 1 forward and then Remove two tapes. Tape Tape Cassette 1 Figure 1-2-11 1-2-8...
  • Page 45 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Remove tape. *: 45ppm/ 55ppm model only Tape Figure 1-2-12 Installing the paper feeder (option) 1. Install the optional paper feeder or large capacity feeder as necessary. 2. Verify levelness at the four corners of the contact glass using a level gauge, and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness.
  • Page 46 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame 1. Remove the scanner lock cover. 2. Mount the scanner lock cover in the reverse manner to restore in the original location. *: Unless unlocking is performed, C3100 is caused. Scanner lock cover [Locked] [Released] Figure 1-2-13...
  • Page 47 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Release of lift plate stopper 1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location. *: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate in original position. Lift plate stopper Cassette...
  • Page 48 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2. Press the guide lock lever to release the lock. 3. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move the paper width guides to fit the paper. Guide lock lever Paper width paper width guides adjusting tab Figure 1-2-16 4.
  • Page 49 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Press the guide lock lever to lock. Guide lock lever Figure 1-2-18 6. Insert the paper size plate and the Paper media plate paper media plate. 7. Gently push the cassette back in. Paper size plate Figure 1-2-19 1-2-13...
  • Page 50 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Installing the toner containers 1. Open the front cover. 2. Hold the toner container vertically and hit the upper part about 3 times. Invert the toner container so that the other end is up, and hit in the same way. 3.
  • Page 51 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Unlocking the developer waste exit Tape Caution To ease setup, the device was shipped with the developer unit already replenished with developer. Therefore, to prevent developer from spilling during shipping, a developer shutter is equipped with the Set up leaflet developer unit.
  • Page 52 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Remove a screw and slide the lever right wards. 4. Fix the lever using the screw previously removed at the right screw hole and unlock the developer waste exit. *: When the device is shipped again or removed, use the reverse procedure to lock in the developer waste exit.
  • Page 53 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Replacing operation panel sheet 1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver and slide the operation panel covers A and B to remove them. Operation panel cover B Operation panel cover A Figure 1-2-25 2. Remove the clear panel. Clear panel Figure 1-2-26 Operation 3.
  • Page 54 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Installing the original platen or DP (option) 1. Install optional original platen or DP. Installing other optional devices 1. Install the optional devices (job separator, document finisher and/or fax kit etc.) as necessary. Installing the cassette heater (option) 1. Install the optional cassette heater as necessary (see page 1-2-67). Connect the power cord 1.
  • Page 55 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Setup for adjusting images 1. Turn the main power switch on. 2. Check the messages on the operation panel After completion of warming up, in case to display "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room tem- perature." on the operation panel, follow the step 4. (Performing Drum Refresh) In case to display “Warning for low temperature.
  • Page 56 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Completion of the machine installation *: The maintenance mode U952 [SETUP] includes the following: If U952 is not used, follow the procedure below. Adjusting the image 1. Performing calibration U464 Setting the ID correction operation - performing calibration *: See the operation guide Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Calibration].
  • Page 57 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (see page 1-3-172) Load the cassette with multiple sheets of A4 or Letter paper. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. Enter 410 using the numeric keys and press the start key. Press [Normal Mode] and then press the start key.

  • Page 58: Setting Initial Copy Modes

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows: Maintenance Contents Factory setting item No. U253 Switching between double and single counts DBL(A3/Ledger) U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode0 U284 Setting 2 color copy mode U285...

  • Page 59: Installing The Key Counter (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) (1) Installing directly on the device Key counter installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Key counter 3025418011 Key counter set 302A369709 Key counter wire 302K946AJ0 M4 nut 3CY06030 *: Not used in 120V model. Supplied parts of key counter set (302A369709): Parts Quantity...
  • Page 60 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Procedure Key counter 1. Press the power key on the operation M4 x 6 screw retainer panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are M4 x 6 screw off before turning off the main power M3 nut switch.
  • Page 61 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 8. Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers. Aperture Right upper cover Figure 1-2-30 9. Remove nine screws and then remove Rear upper the rear upper cover. cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-2-31 1-2-25...
  • Page 62 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Wire guide 10. Release six wire saddles on the control- Wire saddles ler box. 11. Remove the wire holder. Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire saddles Controller box Figure 1-2-32 12. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box.
  • Page 63 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 13. Remove five screws. 14. Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box. Controller box Hook Hook Screw Screws Screws Figure 1-2-34 15. Connect the connector of the key coun- ter wire to the connector YC24 on the engine PWB.
  • Page 64 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 16. Remove two wire holders. 17. Route the key counter wire through the wire guide and fix it at the wire holders. key counter wire Wire guide Wire holders Figure 1-2-36 18. Release three wire saddles. Wire guide 19. Remove the wire holder. 20.
  • Page 65 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 M4 nuts 23. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the right upper cover. Right upper cover Figure 1-2-38 24. Insert the projection of the key counter Right upper cover cover retainer in the aperture of the right upper cover. 25.
  • Page 66 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 26. Pass the connector of the key counter wire through the aperture in the right Right upper cover upper cover. 27. Refit the right upper cover. Aperture 28. Refit the ISU right cover. 29. Close the paper conveying unit. Key counter wire Figure 1-2-40 30.
  • Page 67 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) Mounting on the document table Key counter installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Key counter 3025418011 Key counter set 302A369709 Key counter wire 302K946AJ0 Document table 1902LC0UN2 (option) Supplied parts of key counter set (302A369709): Parts Quantity Part.No.
  • Page 68 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Supplied parts of document table (1902LC0UN2): Parts Quantity Part.No. Tray stay Tray mount Tray cover 302LC04601 Tray lower cover 302LC04710 Tray retainer Sheet 302LC04660 303NS24410 M4 nut 3CY06030 M4 x 8 screw 7BB180408H M4 x 14 screw 7BB607414H *: Sheet x1 is not used. 1-2-32...
  • Page 69 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure 1. Perform steps 1 through 25 as explained in (1) Installing directly on the device. M4 nut M4 nut 2. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the right upper cover. 3. Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws.
  • Page 70 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Fit the tray retainer to the machine Tray retainer using the M4 x 8 screw. *: The procedure described above is not required if an optional right job separator has been installed. M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw Tray retainer Figure 1-2-43 Right upper cover...
  • Page 71 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 M4 x 8 screw 9. Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws. Tray mount Figure 1-2-45 1-2-35...
  • Page 72 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Cut out the aperture plate on the tray cover using nippers. Tray cover 11. Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using Aperture four M4 x 8 screws. M4 x 8 screws M4 x 8 screws Tray cover Figure 1-2-46 12.
  • Page 73 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 13. Pass the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the document M4 x 6 screw Key counter table. cover 14. Fit the key counter cover to the docu- ment table using the M4 x 6 screw. 15. Connect the key counter signal cable to the key counter wire.
  • Page 74 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 16. Fit the tray lower cover. *: Install the key counter signal cable and key counter wire so that they are held behind the tray lower cover. Tray lower cover Connector Figure 1-2-49 1-2-38...
  • Page 75 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. Secure the tray lower cover with two pins. Tray lower cover Figure 1-2-50 Sheet 18. Adhere the sheet onto right side of the document table. 19. Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly. 20. Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode.
  • Page 76 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 1-2-4 Installing the key card MK-2 (option for japan only) Key card installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Key card MK-2 8J272002 (option) MK-2 mount Supplied with MK-2 M4 x 16 screw Document table 1902LC0UN2 (option) M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 7BB100420H *:Not used in this model.
  • Page 77 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power Screws indicator and the memory indicator are ISU right off before turning off the main power cover switch. And then unplug the power Right upper cover cable from the wall outlet.
  • Page 78 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Wire guide 6. Release six wire saddles on the control- Wire saddles ler box. 7. Remove the wire holder. Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire saddles Controller box Figure 1-2-54 8. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box.
  • Page 79 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 9. Remove five screws. 10. Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box. Controller box Hook Hook Screw Screws Screws Figure 1-2-56 11. Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers. Aperture Right upper cover Figure 1-2-57 1-2-43...
  • Page 80 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 12. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the M4 nut M4 nut right upper cover. 13. Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws. Right upper cover M4 nut M4 nut Tray stay M4 x 14 screw Right upper cover...
  • Page 81 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 M4 x 8 screw 14. Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws. Tray mount Figure 1-2-59 15. Cut out the aperture plate on the tray cover using nippers. Figure 1-2-60 1-2-45...
  • Page 82 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 MK-2 16. Pass the MK-2 signal cable through the aperture in the tray cover, tray stay and right upper cover. MK-2 signal cable Aperture Tray corer Aperture MK-2 signal cable Figure 1-2-61 1-2-46...
  • Page 83 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. Connect the connector of the MK-2 sig- nal cable to the connector YC25 on the engine PWB. Ground terminal 18. Remove the screw from the machine. 19. Fix the MK-2 signal cable to the ground Screw terminal with the screw that was removed.
  • Page 84 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 20. Remove three wire holders. Scanner 21. Route the MK-2 signal cable through Wire guide motor the wire guide and fix it at three wire holders. *: Dress the MK-2 signal wire away from the scanner motor and fix. 22.
  • Page 85 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 24. Fit the tray retainer to the machine Tray retainer using the M4 x 8 screw. *: The procedure described above is not required if an optional right job separator has been installed. M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw Tray retainer Figure 1-2-64 M4 x 8 screws...
  • Page 86 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 29. Remove the four screws securing the MK-2 cover; attach the MK-2 mount to the MK-2, and secure using the four MK-2 screws. Screws Screws MK-2 Screws MK-2 mount Screws Figure 1-2-66 30. Fit the MK-2 to the document table M4 x 20 tap-tight S using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws.
  • Page 87 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 31. Fit the tray lower cover. 32. Secure the tray lower cover with two pins. Tray lower cover Figure 1-2-68 1-2-51...
  • Page 88 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 33. Adhere the sheet onto right side of the Sheet document table. 34. Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode. 35. Run maintenance item U204 and select Document table [Key-Card] (see page 1-3-123). 36. Exit the maintenance mode. Figure 1-2-69 1-2-52...
  • Page 89 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-5 Installing the KMAS (option for japan only) KMAS installation requires the following parts: Using the PHS module Parts Quantity Part.No. PHS module HM000080 (option) PHS signal cable 023CK200 (option) KMAS interface PWB 023CK000 (option) M3 x 16 bronze binding screw B3323160 Ferrite core 2A027770...
  • Page 90 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure To fix KMAS, perform the following procedure: Start Setting the DIP switch Fitting the KMAS interface PWB Using the PHS module Using a modem Fitting the PHS signal cable Fitting the RS-232C signal cable and PHS module Initializing the KMAS 1-2-54...
  • Page 91 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Setting the DIP switch 1. Configure DIP switches 1 to 4 on the KMAS interface board as follows: DIP switch Figure 1-2-70 DIP SW No. Description Remarks PHS module/modem switching ON: Use modem OFF: Use PHS module Modem outgoing switching This is required when modem is used.
  • Page 92 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Fitting the KMAS interface PWB 2. Remove nine screws and then remove Rear upper the rear upper cover. cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-2-71 3. Attach one spacer A and three spacers Controller box B to the side of the controller box. Spacer B Spacer A Spacer B...
  • Page 93 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Insert the KMAS interface PWB to three Spacer B spacers B. Spacer B Spacer B KMAS interface PWB Figure 1-2-73 1-2-57...
  • Page 94 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to the connector YC1 on the KMAS PWB. 6. Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to controller fan motor, YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB. KMAS wire KMAS interface PWB Main PWB KMAS wire YC23...
  • Page 95 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Pass the KMAS wire through the edging of the controller box and wire saddle and then fasten the KMAS wire. Edging KMAS wire Wire saddle Figure 1-2-75 Fitting the PHS signal cable and PHS mod- Rear upper cover 8.
  • Page 96 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 11. Connect the connector of the PHS sig- nal cable to the connector YC2 on the KMAS KMAS interface PWB. interface PWB 12. Refit the rear upper cover. PHS signal cable Figure 1-2-77 13. Fit the PHS module to rear upper cover using two M3 x 16 screws.
  • Page 97 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Wrap the PHS signal cable around the ferrite core a turn. 15. Connect the connector of the PHS sig- nal cable to PHS module. 16. Fit the clamp to PHS signal cable. PHS module 17. After using alcohol to clean the rear upper cover, adhere the clamp to rear upper cover.
  • Page 98 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-6 Installing the coin vender (option for japan only) Coin vender installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Coin vender 1905H99JP0 (option) Vender wire Vender base Supplied with M4 x 6 screw coin vender Ferrite core Clamp Vender signal cable 302K946AE0 Procedure 1.
  • Page 99 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Remove nine screws and then remove Rear upper the rear upper cover. cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-2-81 4. Remove eight screws. 5. Release two hanging parts and then Screw remove the rear lower cover. Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screws Figure 1-2-82...
  • Page 100 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Remove two screws and then remove the lid. Screws Figure 1-2-83 7. Connect the connector of the vender YC23 Engine PWB Wire guide signal cable to the connector YC23 on the engine PWB. 8. Pass the vender signal cable through the wire guide and ten wire saddles and then fasten the cable.
  • Page 101 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 9. Pass the vender wire through the aper- ture in the IF mount. 10. Secure the vender wire with two screws Ground removed in step 6. terminal 11. Secure the ground terminal of the vender wire to rear frame with the screw.
  • Page 102 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 15. Fit the ferrite core to signal cable of coin vender. Coin vender 16. Fit the clamp to signal cable of coin vender. 17. Remove a screw from the coin vender Clamp and fix the coin vender with a clamp. Screw Ferrite core Signal cable...

  • Page 103: Installing The Cassette Heater (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-7 Installing the cassette heater (option) Cassette heater installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Cassette heater set (120V) 302K994931 Cassette heater set (240V) 302K994941 Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994931): Parts Quantity Part.No. Cassette heater (120V) 302H794620 Wire saddle 7YZM610001++H01...
  • Page 104 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 2.
  • Page 105 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-8 4. Remove the cassette 2 in the same manner as above. Cassette2 Figure 1-2-91 5. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom frame of the machine. 6. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8 screws. Wire saddle Screw Wire saddle Screw...
  • Page 106 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-8 7. Pass the wire of the cassette heater through three wire saddles and then fasten the wire. *: Route the wire so that it do not disturb opening and closing the cassettes. 8. Connect the connector of the cassette Connector heater to the connector in the rear frame of the machine.
  • Page 107 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 11. Adhere the caution label after wiping the bottom frame of this side of cassette heater with alcohol. Caution label Figure 1-2-95 12. Replace the cassette 1 and 2. *: Perform the maintenance mode U327 to configure the cassette heater control settings after a cassette heater was installed.

  • Page 108: Installing The Gigabit Ethernet Board (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-8 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option) Gigabit ethernet board installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Gigabit ethernet board 1505JV0UN0 (option) Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation Slot cover panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
  • Page 109 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Insert the gigabit ethernet board along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two pins that have been Gigabit removed in step 2. ethernet board *: Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet board terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit ethernet board, or the projection of the board to insert the gigabit ethernet board.
  • Page 110 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-9 Installing the Wire-less interface kit (option) Wire-less interface kit installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Wire-less interface kit 1505J50UN0 (option) Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation Slot cover panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
  • Page 111 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Insert the wire-less interface kit along the groove in OPT2 and secure the Wire-less board with two pins that have been interface kit removed in step 2. *: Do not directly touch the wire-less inter- face kit terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the wire-less interface kit, or the projection of the board to insert the wire-less interface kit.

  • Page 112: Installing The Ic Card Reader Holder (Option)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-10 Installing the IC card reader holder (option) IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Card reader holder (E) 1709AD0UN1 (option) Supplied parts of IC card reader holder (E)(1709AD0UN1): Parts Quantity Part.No. IC card reader holder Label Bundling band Hook and loop fasteners...
  • Page 113 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove the hook and remove the Hook upper cover B. Upper cover B. Figure 1-2-102 5. The mounting procedure differs IC card reader depending type of IC card readers. Type A: Thicker and in the same size as its holder Continue to step 6.
  • Page 114 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the IC card reader holder IC card reader and IC card reader holder. Hook and loop fasteners Hook and loop fasteners IC card reader (Type A) 7. Mount the IC card reader to the IC card IC card reader holder reader holder.
  • Page 115 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 8. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the IC card reader holder IC card reader and IC card reader holder. Hook and *: Affix a hook and loop fastener onto the IC loop fasteners card reader so that it is mounted on the holder with both being flush with the right side edges.
  • Page 116 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Route the USB cable from the IC card IC card reader holder reader through the IC card reader holder ribs, wind around its back and route through another rib. *: Make sure the cable will have a slack of more than 20 cm.
  • Page 117 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 11. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the IC card reader holder IC card reader. 12. Affix a hook and loop fastener at the Spacer reverse side of the spacer where an adhesive tape has been affixed. Affix two spacers to the IC card reader. Hook and loop fasteners Spacer...
  • Page 118 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 USB cable 14. Route the USB cable from the IC card IC card reader holder reader through the ribs at the bottom of the IC card reader holder, wind around its back a couple of turns, and route through the rib on the left hand side. Rib(left) USB cable Rib(bottom)
  • Page 119 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 15. Hook the IC card reader holder onto the Holes machine by mating the two holes on the holder with the hooks on the machine. IC card reader holder Hooks IC card reader holder Figure 1-2-109 USB connector 16. Connect the USB cable with the USB USB cable connector on the machine.
  • Page 120 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. For only type C of the IC card reader, bundle the surplus length of the cable with a bundling band and hook it on the hook. Bundling band Hook Figure 1-2-111 Positioning mark 18. Affix a label on the upper cover B align- ing it with the positioning mark.
  • Page 121 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 19. Replace the upper cover B. Insert the right-hand hook first, then the left-hand hook. Hooks Hooks Upper cover B Figure 1-2-113 20. Replace the staple cover and the staple holder in their original positions. Staple cover Screw Staple holder Figure 1-2-114 1-2-85...
  • Page 122 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Enabling IC Card Authentication Precautions To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or service representative, and register “Machine No.” indicated on your machine and “Product ID” indi- cated on the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key. 1.
  • Page 123 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-11 Installing the keyboard holder (option) Keyboard holder (B) installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Keyboard holder (B) 1709AF0UN1 (option) Supplied parts of keyboard holder (B)(1709AF0UN1): Parts Quantity Part.No. Upper keyboard holder Lower keyboard holder Upper keyboard cover Lower keyboard cover Cable cover Upper lid...
  • Page 124 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove a screw from the machine. Screw Figure 1-2-116 5. Fit the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the machine using the two S Tite screws M4 x 12. Lower keyboard mounting bracket S Tite screws M4 x 12 Figure 1-2-117 1-2-88...
  • Page 125 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Fix the upper keyboard mounting S Tite screw S Tite screws M3 x 8 bracket onto the lower keyboard mount- M3 x 8 ing bracket using the four S Tite screws M3 x 8. Align them with each other at the mark Upper keyboard mounting...
  • Page 126 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 8. Insert the two positioning pins at the hooks Upper keyboard bottom of the lower keyboard cover in hole mount the holes on the keyboard mounting bracket, and slide towards the rear. 9. Latch the lower keyboard cover with the upper keyboard mount by the five hooks.
  • Page 127 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 S Tite screws 11. Fix the upper keyboard cover onto the M3 x 8 upper keyboard mounting bracket using Upper keyboard the five S Tite screws M3 x 8. cover S Tite screws M3 x 8 Figure 1-2-122 Hook and loop fasteners 12.
  • Page 128 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 13. Fix the keyboard with the hook and loop USB connector fasteners. 14. Connect the USB cable with the USB USB cable connector on the machine. Keyboard Figure 1-2-124 Bundling bands 15. Bundle the surplus length of the cable with two bundling bands and hook it on the hook of the upper keyboard cover.
  • Page 129 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 16. Slide the upper lid and fix in the machine. Upper lid Figure 1-2-126 17. Fix the cable cover on the machine. Latch the three hooks at the near end Cable cover and press the hooks downwards to mate with the holes at the far end. Holes Hole Cable cover...
  • Page 130 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 18. Latch the hook of the lower lid with the machine. S Tite screws 19. Fit the lower lid with the machine using M3 x 8 a S Tite screws M3 x 8. Lower lid Hook Lower lid Figure 1-2-128 20.
  • Page 131 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 1-2-12 Installing the Printed Document Guard Kit (option) Printed Document Guard Kit installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Printed Document Guard Kit(B) 1503P40UN0 Supplied parts of Printed Document Guard Kit : Parts Quantity Part.No. Copy guard PWB FFC (short) FFC (long)*1 Mount plate B*1...
  • Page 132 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Insert the FFC (short) into the copy guard PWB until it clicks in. WIthout a DP relay circuit PWB A FFC is used at YC2 (serigraphed on MAIN) WIth a DP relay circuit PWB Two FFCs are used at YC2 (serigraphed on MAIN) YC1 (Serigraphed on DP) Copy Guard PWB YC2(MAIN)
  • Page 133 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Main-circuit PWB YC34 5. Connect the main-circuit PWB and the DP relay circuit PWB with the FFC. ･ WIthout a DP relay circuit PWB Main- circuit PWB YC34 ・WIth a DP relay circuit PWB Main-cir- cuit PWB YC34 DP relay circuit PWB YC35 DP relay circuit PWB YC35 Figure 1-2-133 6.
  • Page 134 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-13 Installing the duct unit (option) Duct unit installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Duct unit 302LC94530 Supplied parts of duct unit (302LC94530): Parts Quantity Part.No. Duct A Duct B Filter M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw 7BB200308H M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw (black) 7BB282308H...
  • Page 135 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Duct A 3. Fit two filters to duct A. Filters Figure 1-2-135 4. Remove the screw A from the rear lower cover. Rear lower cover Screw A Figure 1-2-136 1-2-99...
  • Page 136 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Fit the duct unit to the machine using the removed screw A, M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw (black) and two M3 x 8 tap-tight S screws (black). M3 x 8 tap-tight S screws (black) M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw (black) Screw A Figure 1-2-137...
  • Page 137 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-2-14 Installing the handset (option for Japan only) (1) Installing directly on the device Handset installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset 1909AG9JP0 (option) Supplied parts of handset (1909AG9JP0): Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset Handset base Handset mount Protection cover Telephone wire Modular cable...
  • Page 138 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation Screws panel to off. Make sure that the power ISU right indicator and the memory indicator are cover off before turning off the main power Right upper cover switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
  • Page 139 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the M4 nuts right upper cover. 6. Fit the handset mount to the right upper cover using two pins. *: Use the lower screw holes. Right upper cover M4 nuts Handset mount Pins Right upper cover...
  • Page 140 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Refit the right upper cover. Pins 8. Refit the ISU right cover. 9. Close the paper conveying unit. 10. Remove two nuts and two pins from the handset mount and remount it at mark Handset mount Figure 1-2-140 1-2-104...
  • Page 141 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 11. Insert the pins at the insert parts on the back of the handset base, and slide it towards you. Handset base Figure 1-2-141 1-2-105...
  • Page 142 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 12. Fit the protection cover to the handset mount. Protection cover Handset mount Figure 1-2-142 13. Connect the telephone wire to the Handset handset and the handset base. Handset base Telephone wire Figure 1-2-143 1-2-106...
  • Page 143 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Connect the modular cable to the hand- set base and the machine. Modular cable Handset base Modular cable Figure 1-2-144 1-2-107...
  • Page 144 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) Mounting on the document table Handset installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset 1909AG9JP0 (option) Document table 1902LC0UN2 (option) Supplied parts of handset (1909AG9JP0): Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset Handset base Handset mount Protection cover Telephone wire Modular cable M4 nut 3CY06030...
  • Page 145 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation Screws panel to off. Make sure that the power ISU right indicator and the memory indicator are cover off before turning off the main power Right upper cover switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
  • Page 146 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the M4 nut M4 nut right upper cover. 6. Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws. Right upper cover M4 nut M4 nut Tray stay M4 x 14 screw Right upper cover...
  • Page 147 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Fit the tray retainer to the machine Tray retainer using the M4 x 8 screw. *: The procedure described above is not required if an optional right job separator has been installed. 8. Refit the right upper cover. 9.
  • Page 148 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 M4 x 8 screw 11. Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws. Tray mount Figure 1-2-148 1-2-112...
  • Page 149 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 M4 x 8 screws 12. Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using four M4 x 8 screws. M4 x 8 screws Tray cover Figure 1-2-149 Pins 13. Remove two nuts and two pins from the handset mount. 14.
  • Page 150 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 15. Insert the pins at the insert parts on the back of the handset base, and slide it towards you. Handset base Pins Figure 1-2-151 Breakaway cover 16. Cut out the breakaway cover on the tray lower cover using nippers. Tray lower cover Figure 1-2-152 1-2-114...
  • Page 151 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. Fit the tray lower cover. 18. Secure the tray lower cover with two pins. Tray lower cover Figure 1-2-153 1-2-115...
  • Page 152 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 19. Adhere the sheet onto left side of the document table. Document table Sheet Figure 1-2-154 20. Connect the telephone wire to the Handset handset and the handset base. Handset base Telephone wire Figure 1-2-155 1-2-116...
  • Page 153 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 21. Connect the modular cable to the hand- set base and the machine. Modular cable Handset base Modular cable Figure 1-2-156 1-2-117...

  • Page 154: Optional Applications

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 1-2-15 Optional Applications Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine. Applications INstall page Data Security Kit page 1-2-119 Internet FAX Kit page 1-2-120 Card Authentication Kit* page 1-2-124 ThinPrint Option (UG-33)* page 1-2-125 Emulation Upgrade Kit (UG-34) page 1-2-126 *: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

  • Page 155: Data Security Kit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (1) Data Security Kit The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
  • Page 156 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (2) Internet FAX Kit Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added when the FAX Kit is installed. *: To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No"...
  • Page 157 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 i-FAX Default Settings Use this page to enable the internet faxing. The settings available on the page are shown below. Item Description Common Transmis Local FAX Name Enter the local fax name. Settings sion TTI Selects On or Off whether to send the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identifier) information to the other party.
  • Page 158 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item Description i-FAX SMTP SMTP Port Number Set the port number used by SMTP. Normally, 25 is used. Settings SMTP Server Timeout Enter the timeout period in seconds. Authentication Protocol Specify whether SMTP authentication will be used or whether [POP before SMTP] will be used. This SMTP authentication is compatible with Microsoft Exchange 2000.
  • Page 159 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item Description i-FAX POP3 Test Runs a test to determine whether the settings specified in Settings this page are correct. E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size for E-mails that can be received in kilobytes. You can set up to 32,767 kilobytes. If 0 is entered, the setting does not limit the maximum size.

  • Page 160: Card Authentication Kit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (3) Card Authentication Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank and prohibiting transmis- sion.
  • Page 161 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 To register on the computer The ID Register utility for registering/deleting ID card information on the computer is provided. You can download the ID Register utility from the vendor’s website. (4) ThinPrint Option This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver. *: To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
  • Page 162 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (5) Emulation Upgrade Kit Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation. To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID." Installation Procedure 1.

  • Page 163: Maintenance Mode

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. (1) Executing a maintenance item Start Enter “10871087” using Maintenance mode is entered. the numeric keys. Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.

  • Page 164: Maintenance Modes Item List

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Maintenance modes item list Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm General U000 Output Maintenance Report U001 Exiting the maintenance mode U002 Setting the factory default data U003 Setting the service telephone number U004 Setting the machine number U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID U018 Check Firmware Checksum...
  • Page 165 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Drive, U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor paper speed feed and Motor1 paper 0/0/0/17/0 0/0/0/15/0 Motor2 0/0/0/-/0 convey- ing sys- Motor3 -31/0/-46/ -26/0/-39/ -20/0/-30/ -18/0/-27/ -46/39/0/ -39/33/0/ -30/82/0/ -27/73/0/...
  • Page 166 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Optical U087 Setting DP reading position modification 125/125/125 operation U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern U091 Setting the white line correction 112/112/112/75/0 U099 Adjusting original size detection DP is not installed 20/30/40/20/30/40/20/30/40 DP is installed 50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50...
  • Page 167 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm High U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary voltage transfer Light/Normal 1st 125/118/ 131/123/ 143/134/ 150/139/ Normal2/3 1st Light/Normal 2nd 167/133/ 180/140/ 207/155/ 220/163/ Normal2/3 2nd Light/Normal 1st 3/4(Gloss) 120/114/111 131/123/120 Normal2/3 1st 3/4(Gloss)
  • Page 168 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm High U110 Checking the drum count voltage U111 Checking the drum drive time U117 Checking the drum number U118 Displaying the drum history U119 Setting the drum U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count...
  • Page 169 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Developer U140 Image Preference Copy U147 Setting for toner applying operation Mode Mode1 Upper Limit Minimum Interval Number 250/100/50 U148 Setting drum refresh mode Normal Dew Condensation U155 Checking sensors for toner U156 Setting the toner replenishment level Supply...
  • Page 170 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Operation U204 Setting the presence or absence of a Off/Coin Vender panel and key card or key counter support U206 Setting the presence or absence of a equip- coin vender ment...
  • Page 171 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm 600000/600000/600000/0/150000/150000/ Mode U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance setting cycle 150000/150000/150000/150000/150000/ 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/ U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter U252 Setting the destination U253 Switching between double and single DBL(A3/Ledger) counts U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U265 Setting OEM purchaser code...
  • Page 172 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Image U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration process- for memory image printing U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically U412 Adjusting the uneven density U415 Adjusting the print position automatically U425 Setting the target U429 Setting the offset for the color balance...
  • Page 173 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Image U470 System 90/90 process- U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation 1000 U485 Setting the image processing mode U486 Setting color/black and white operation Mode2 mode Others U520 Set TDRS U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts...

  • Page 174: Contents Of The Maintenance Mode Items

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Contents of the maintenance mode items Item No. Description U000 Output Maintenance Report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB memory.
  • Page 175 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Method: Send to the USB memory 1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch. 2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. 3.

  • Page 176: Event Log

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Event log Event Log 2013/01/31 08:40 Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2013.01.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (12) Paper Jam Log Counter Log Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time J0000: J0041: C0000: 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:56 J0001: J0042: C0001: 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01...
  • Page 177 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Detail of event log Items Description Controller BROM version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Paper Jam Count. Event Descriptions Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count Log code (hexadeci- occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories) rence of the previous...
  • Page 178 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Items Description Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal) cont. 01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1 02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2 03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3 04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4 05: Bond 0E: Coated...
  • Page 179 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U000 Items Description Service Call Count. Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Self diagnostic error code of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-62) diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics the occurrence of error.
  • Page 180 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U000 Items Description (11) Unknown Toner Count. Item Remembers 1 to 5 The total page count Unknown toner log of occurrence of at the time of the code unknown toner toner empty error (1 byte, 2 categories) detection.

  • Page 181: Service Status Page

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Service status page (1) Service Status Page 2012/10/27 12:00 Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2 (31) Rings (Normal) Memory status (32) Rings (FAX/TEL) Total Size 3.5 GB (33) Rings (TAD) (34) Option DIMM Size...

  • Page 182: Engine Information

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U000 Service status page (2) Service Status Page 2012/10/27 12:00 Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Engine Information Send Information (40) (44) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 Date and Time 10/10/27 (41) (45) Scanner Version 2N4_1200.001.089 Address (42) FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version...
  • Page 183 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U000 Detail of service status page Description Supplement Firmware version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Total memory size Local time zone Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute (10) NTP server name (11)
  • Page 184 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (26) Average coverage for printer Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (27) Average coverage for fax Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (28) Cleared date and output date (29) Coverage on the final output page (30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.
  • Page 185 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed. (43) Mac address (44) The last sent date and time (45) Transmission address (46) Destination information (47) Area information (48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin...
  • Page 186 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (63) Job end detection mode (64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off 1: On (65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings 1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High * : For details on settings, 1: Normal 1 1: Middle...
  • Page 187 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (88) Data Sanitization information (89) Toner low setting 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%) (91) Limiting shifting for one-page 0: Invalid (No shift limit) document 1: Valid (Shift limit) (92) Setting confirmation display for 0: Not shown...
  • Page 188 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U002 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings. Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport. * : The parameter settings within the system menu will also be reset to the factory-set values. Method 1.
  • Page 189 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U004 Setting the machine number Description Sets or displays the machine number. Purpose Performed to assign or confirm the machine ID when the EEPROM on the main PWB has been replaced. Method 1. Press the start key. If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB Display Description...
  • Page 190 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Description Sets the maintenance mode ID. Purpose Modify maintenance mode ID for more security. Method 1. Press the start key. Display Description New ID Enter a new 8-digit ID New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit ID (to confirm) Initialize Initialize the ID...
  • Page 191 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U018 If the verified result was incorrect, the following are displayed. Display Description f001 An expected-value file does not exist. f002 Reading the expected-value file failed. f003 Illegal data in the expected-value file (not 64-byte data) s001t Failure to read the checksum The expected value and the checksum do not match.
  • Page 192 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U019 Display Description Color Table1(Copy)* Color table 1 (copy) software Color Table2(Copy)* Color table 2 (copy) software Color Table1(Prn)* Color table 1 (printer) software Color Table2(Prn)* Color table 2 (printer) software Document processor firmware DP Boot Document processor booting DP SSW DP multi feed sensor...
  • Page 193 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U021 Memory initializing Description Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter setting, service call history and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specifica- tion selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination. Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default.
  • Page 194 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Item No. Description U024 HDD formatting Description Initializes the hard disk. Purpose To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping. Caution In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk. System menu (user login administration, job accounting, address book, one-touch keys and doc- ument box etc.), shortcuts and panel programs When fully formatted, the following pre-installed software are removed.
  • Page 195 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U025 Firmware Update(Security) Description Used to execute FW-Update from the USB flash device while Very High is selected in the Secu- rity Level settings under the System Menu. Purpose Firmware upgrading is initiated by a service person to conduct U025 while a USB flash device is inserted.
  • Page 196 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U030 Checking the operation of the motors Description Drives each motor. Purpose To check the operation of each motor. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the motor to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Description Feed...
  • Page 197 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path. Purpose To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1.
  • Page 198 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U032 Checking the operation of the clutches Description Turn each clutch on. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the clutch to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Description Feed1...
  • Page 199 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids Description Turn each solenoid on. Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the solenoid to be operated.z 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Description Branch Left...
  • Page 200 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U034 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
  • Page 201 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U034 Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Press the start key to output a test pattern. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Select the item to be adjusted. [LSU Out Top] Setting Initial Change in...
  • Page 202 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U034 5. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- or numeric keys. For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value. Leading edge registration (20 ± 1.0 mm) Correct image Output Output example 1...
  • Page 203 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U034 5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value. Center line of printing (within ± 2.0 mm) Correct image Output Output example 1...
  • Page 204 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper. Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper.
  • Page 205 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors Description Drives each fan motor. Purpose To check the operation of each fan motor. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the fan motor to be operated. 3.
  • Page 206 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U039 Adjusting the magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the printing. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. Caution Adjust the magnification in the following order. U065 U070 U039 (P.1-3-56) (P.1-3-61) Method...
  • Page 207 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller. Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is Z-folded.
  • Page 208 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U051 [Paper Loop Amount B/W] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray...
  • Page 209 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U052 Setting the fuser motor control Description Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is replaced and Perform correction processing for the fuser motor. Purpose To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit. Method 1.
  • Page 210 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Perform fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors. Purpose Basically, the setting need not be changed. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty images occur. Method 1.
  • Page 211 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor2] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Dev(K) Developer motor K -5000 to 5000 0 (DEVM-K) Dev(CMY) Developer motor MCY -5000 to 5000 0 (DEVM-MCY) Trans Belt Transfer motor (TRM)
  • Page 212 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor4] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Drum B/ Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 - W(K)* black/white mode Drum Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 42 Mono(K) monochrome mode...
  • Page 213 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor1 Half] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) in half speed -5000 to 5000 Setting: [Motor2 Half] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display...
  • Page 214 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm DU1* Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) -5000 to 5000 - in half speed DU2* Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) -5000 to 5000 - in half speed 1. *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only. Setting: [Motor1 3/4] 1.
  • Page 215 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor3 3/4] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Eject motor (EM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -40 times of line speed Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 0 times of line speed Bridge1...
  • Page 216 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U059 Setting fan mode Description Specifies mode for developer fan motors. Purpose Handling the lowering density [to suppress thermal stresses owing to the heated toner] Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the mode. Display Description Fan Mode Sets threshold temperature at which developer fan motors oper-...
  • Page 217 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp Description Lights the exposure lamp. Purpose To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description The exposure lamp lights The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed) 3.
  • Page 218 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. Caution The magnification adjustment along the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depending on the content of the original document.
  • Page 219 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U065 Adjustment: [Sub Scan] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image shorter.
  • Page 220 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
  • Page 221 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1.
  • Page 222 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Perform the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used.
  • Page 223 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used. Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS is used.
  • Page 224 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image. Copy Original Copy...
  • Page 225 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi- nal and the copy image when the DP is used. Method 1.
  • Page 226 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image backward.
  • Page 227 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U072 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. Adjustment 1.
  • Page 228 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U073 Checking the scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions. Purpose To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit glass. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 229 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U073 Method: [Home Position] 1. Select [Home Position]. 2. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position. Method: [Dust Check] 1. Select [Dust Check]. 2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights. 3.
  • Page 230 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U074 DP input response adjustment Description Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP. Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not match.
  • Page 231 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
  • Page 232 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output (with-out scanning). Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 233 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U091 Setting the white line correction Description Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of abnormal pixels. Purpose To perform when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller. Method 1.
  • Page 234 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U091 How to view test copies blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures No lines No lines Complete Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass glass and then perform U091 again Black lines No lines Engine side...
  • Page 235 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U099 Method: [Data1/Data2] 1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP 2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is detected two times when the DP is installed.) Display Description...
  • Page 236 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U099 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed. U100 Adjusting main high voltage Description Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential. Purpose To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur, etc.) occurs. Method 1.
  • Page 237 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U100 Displaying: [Set DC Bias] 1. The current setting is displayed. Display Description DC1 Bias(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed) DC1 Bias Half(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed) DC1 Bias(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed) DC1 Bias Half(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed)
  • Page 238 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U100 Setting: [Set Charger Freq] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.ll Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Generally Main charger frequency 7500 to 10442 8857 8807...
  • Page 239 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U101 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the primary transfer. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 240 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U101 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys. [Normal]l Setting Initial Display Description range setting Addition value (cyan) -127 to 127 Addition value (magenta) -127 to 127 Addition value (black) -127 to 127 [Heavy 4/5]l Setting Initial...
  • Page 241 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U101 [Heavy 4/5] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Addition value for the second -127 to side (cyan) Addition value for the second -127 to side (magenta) Addition value for the second -127 to side (yellow) Addition value for the second...
  • Page 242 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur. Method 1.
  • Page 243 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 [1st] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [2nd] Initial setting Setting Display Description...
  • Page 244 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 Setting: [Normal2/3] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed) 1st 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of line speed...
  • Page 245 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 [2nd 3/4(Gloss)] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [1st B/W] Initial setting Setting Display...
  • Page 246 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 [2nd 3/4] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: [Heavy2/3] 1.
  • Page 247 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 [1st Half] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [2nd Half] Initial setting Setting Display...
  • Page 248 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U106 Setting: [Bias] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 (full speed) Reverse Transfer reverse bias...
  • Page 249 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage Description Sets the cleaning control voltage for transfer belt unit. Purpose Change settings if an offset has occurred due to the failure of cleaning the transfer belt. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 250 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U108 Setting separation shift bias Description Adjusts output of separation shift bias and ON/OFF timing. Purpose To set when the separated malfunction of the paper occurs. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Output...
  • Page 251 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U108 Setting: [Output 3/4 / Output B/W] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric key. Initial setting Setting Display Description range Output Output B/W* Light 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m...
  • Page 252 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking. Purpose To check the drum status. Method 1. Press the start key. The current drum counts is displayed. Display Description Drum count value for cyan Drum count value for magenta Drum count value for yellow Drum count value for black...
  • Page 253 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number. Purpose To check the drum number. Method 1. Press the start key. The drum number is displayed. Display Description Cyan drum number Magenta drum number Yellow drum number Black drum number Completion Press the stop key.
  • Page 254 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U119 Setting the drum Description Sets drum sensitivity. Purpose To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [Execute]. 3.
  • Page 255 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count Description Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter. Purpose To check the count or drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Also to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller. Method 1.
  • Page 256 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U130 Initial setting for the developer Description The toner sensor control bias is adjusted so that the sensor output is set as the target value with the initial developer. Purpose Automatically executed when the developer unit loaded with the initial developer is replaced. Method 1.
  • Page 257 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage Description Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage. Purpose If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure, etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value. Method 1.
  • Page 258 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U131 Setting: [Mode] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Initial setting: Auto 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key.
  • Page 259 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U135 Checking toner motor operation Description Drives toner motors. Purpose To check the operation of toner motors. Remarks When driving the toner motors long time or several times, developer section becomes the toner full and is locked. Method 1.
  • Page 260 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine Description Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine. Purpose To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Ext/Int...
  • Page 261 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U140 Displaying developer bias Description Displays and changes various developer bias value. Purpose To check or changes the developer bias value. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Sleeve DC Developer sleeve roller DC bias Sleeve AC...
  • Page 262 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Sleeve AC] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 for cyan Developer sleeve roller AC bias...
  • Page 263 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Mag AC] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 for cyan Developer magnet roller AC bias...
  • Page 264 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Mag Duty] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Normal Developer magnet roller duty 0 to 99 B/W* Developer magnet roller duty in...
  • Page 265 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Type] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Display Description Continue the present setting and execute AC calibration Set high altitude grain mode On and execute AC calibration Cancel high altitude grain mode setting and execute AC cali- bration * : High altitude grain mode: Perform AC calibration in a high altitude installation and improve that image density becomes lighter.
  • Page 266 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U140 Method: [AC Calib] (30 ppm model/ 35 ppm model) 1. Select the item. Display Description High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Method: [High Altitude] (30 ppm model/ 35 ppm model) 1. Select mode. Display Description Display...
  • Page 267 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U147 Setting for toner applying operation Description Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developing unit (T7 control: Toner applying operation). Defines the action that the toner accumulated on the developer blade is sent back in the developer unit (done by the vibration motor).
  • Page 268 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U147 Setting: [Interval Number] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Print(Normal) During continuous printing (Normal environ- 10 to 500 ment) Print(H/H) During continuous printing (High humidity...
  • Page 269 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U155 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the toner sensor output value. Purpose To check the output value for each color when any image problems occur. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be display. Display Description Waste Toner...
  • Page 270 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U156 Setting the toner replenishment level Description Sets the toner replenishment level for each color. Purpose To change settings according to the original image. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Supply...
  • Page 271 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U157 Checking the developer drive time Description Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when cor- recting the toner control. Purpose To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit. Method 1.
  • Page 272 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a fuser problem on thick paper. Method 1.
  • Page 273 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U161 Setting: [Print] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Full Speed Temperature at maximum 130 to 200 Print(Center) print speed (Center) (°C)
  • Page 274 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U161 Less than Less than 21°C 21°C or more Temperature to Acti- 13+α°C vate Aging 30 sec 0 sec 0 sec Time for Low-tempera- ture Aging Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count Description...
  • Page 275 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Item No. Description U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source Description Displays and settings the reference voltage of the fuser IH PWB. Purpose To check the reference voltage. * : When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH control PWB.
  • Page 276 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature Description Displays the detected fuser temperature. Purpose To check the fuser temperature. Method 1. Press the start key. The fuser temperature is displayed. Display Description Heat Roller Edge1 Heat roller edge temperature (C) Heat Roller Edge2 Heat roller edge temperature (C) Heat Roller Center...
  • Page 277 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 Initializing the touch panel Description Adjust touch panel detecting positions. Purpose When the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned, perform this simulation to correct and confirm. Method 1.
  • Page 278 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 Press the center of the “+” sign. * Press it using a tool with a fine tip. Figure 1-3-20 4. If two “ ” signs appear, press the both points at the same time. * : While pressing down one of " "...
  • Page 279 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 6. Press the center of "+" sign displayed, as step 2 7. Repeat three times. Press the center of the “+” sign. * Press it using a tool with a fine tip. If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again. Figure 1-3-23 Press the center of the “+”...
  • Page 280 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 8. After completing the setting, “Initialize Completed.” is displayed and entering Check mode. Initialize completed. Figure 1-3-26 Method: [Check Single Tap Check 1. Press the start key. Initialize 2. Press the center of three "+" signs and confirm the display positions.
  • Page 281 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 Multi Tap chek 1. Select "Multi tap check", and press the Step1 : Not completed start key. Step2 : Not completed Initialize 2. Press two “ ” signs at the same time. (Step1) * : If the detecting values are not within Multi Tap Check.
  • Page 282 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U201 * : If the detecting values are not within Step1 : Completed the setting values, pressed detecting Step2 : Not completed Initialize positions are displayed by red Multi Tap Check Step1 points. And "Multi tap check Step 1" button is displayed.
  • Page 283 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. Purpose Performed at installation, periodic maintenance, and/or repair.
  • Page 284 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP. Purpose To check the DP operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3.
  • Page 285 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U203 Setting: [Result] Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
  • Page 286 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
  • Page 287 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U206 Setting: [Price] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Normal Charge setting: Normal Charge setting: Commercial Print Charge setting: Print Charge setting: Extended Setting: [Normal / AD] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Black &...

  • Page 288: Table Of Contents

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U206 3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range CMY/RGB Full Color A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 B4 size 0 to 300 Card Post card 0 to 300 Other Other 0 to 300...
  • Page 289 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U207 Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys. Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2.

  • Page 290: Select The Item To Be Set

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U209 Set RTC (Real Time Clock) Date Description Assign a date and time to RTC. Purpose Used to assign a date and time to RTC when Maintenance T is displayed after C0840 is detected. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2.

  • Page 291: Select The Item

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U221 Setting the USB host lock function Description Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be unable to recognize the device connected to the USB host. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user. Method 1.
  • Page 292 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U223 Operation panel lock Description Sets the operation panel lock function. Purpose This is performed to inhibit operating and canceling the system menu on the operation panel which may be done by others then an administrator. Setting 1.
  • Page 293 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U224 Panel sheet extension Description Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user.
  • Page 294 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U224 Supplement 2 Displaying start display The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping. Graphics display on service call display The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call. How to change the message Entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display will let service call messages 1 and 2.
  • Page 295 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U237 Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred. Method 1.
  • Page 296 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U240 Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turn each motor and solenoid of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher ON. Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet fin- isher.
  • Page 297 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U240 Display Description Sort Test DF shift motor 1, 2 (DFSFM1, 2) is turned on Eject Unlock(30) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 30-sheet stack Eject Unlock(50) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack Eject Unlock(Fix) DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position Eject Unlock(Full)
  • Page 298 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U240 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
  • Page 299 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U241 Display Description Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) Bundle Eject HP DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor (DFADS) Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor (DFPDS) Shift Front HP DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1)
  • Page 300 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U241 Method: [Booklet] 1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. Display Description CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) Eject...
  • Page 301 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turn the motors or solenoids in the DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. 3.
  • Page 302 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP. Purpose To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 303 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel. Purpose To check the messages to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Change the message using the cursor up/down keys. When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the message corresponding the specified number is displayed.
  • Page 304 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher, if furnished. Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode. Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
  • Page 305 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Punch Regist] 1. Select [Punch Regist]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing -20 to 20 0.25 mm If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the setting value.
  • Page 306 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Punch Width] 1. Select [Punch Width]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4 0.52 mm If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine, increase the setting value.
  • Page 307 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Staple HP] 1. Select [Staple HP]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15 0.19 mm When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the setting value.
  • Page 308 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Width Up HP/Width Down HP] 1. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15 to 15 0.34 mm Adjustment of lower side registration home position...
  • Page 309 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Booklet Pos] 1. Select [Booklet Pos1], [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size...
  • Page 310 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U247 Setting the paper feed device Description Turn on motor and clutches of paper feeder device. Purpose To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper feed device. Display Description Paper feeder...
  • Page 311 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U247 Method: [LCF/Side LCF] 1. Press [Motor] or [Clutch] and select the item. Display Description Motor PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on V Feed Clutch...
  • Page 312 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U247 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U249 Finisher operation test Description Perform operating tests on the 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the operation of the 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1.
  • Page 313 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U250 Display Description Setting Initial setting range Cassette 5 Maintenance counter cassette5 0 to 9999999 150000 Cassette 6 Maintenance counter cassette6 0 to 9999999 150000 Cassette 7 Maintenance counter cassette7 0 to 9999999 150000 Clear Maintenance counter all clear 0 to 9999999 4.
  • Page 314 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter Description Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment count. Purpose To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service. Setting 1.
  • Page 315 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
  • Page 316 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode. Purpose Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
  • Page 317 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters. Purpose To be set according to user request. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the copy count timing. Display Description Feed...
  • Page 318 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U271 Setting the page count Description Banner counting Purpose To change when modifying counting Banner * : If U253 is adjusted to double-counting, the value which is multiplied with this value will be the count value. Setting 1.
  • Page 319 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U278 Setting the delivery date Description Enter delivery date in month, day, and year. Purpose To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [Today]. 3.
  • Page 320 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U285 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting. Purpose According to user request, changes the setting. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select On or Off. Display Description Displays the print coverage Not to display the print coverage Initial setting: On 3.
  • Page 321 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U325 Setting the paper interval Description Due to the fact that, if toner consumption per driving time drastically lowers, the variation in color- ing and low density and gray background become prominent, the print coverage that executes toner ejection according to the low density at a continued vertical printing with the low coverage data must be changed.
  • Page 322 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
  • Page 323 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U327 Setting the cassette heater control Description Sets the cassette heater control. Purpose To change the setting according to the machine installation environment. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to set.. Display Description Mode1 Setting On when the humidity is 65%.
  • Page 324 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation.Make settings on the color copy and color print coverage counter displays, as well as the coverage threshold.
  • Page 325 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U332 1. Select the item. 2. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Level 1 Low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 Level 2 Middle coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.9 Press the start key.
  • Page 326 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U340 Setting: [Adj Max Job] 1. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs The maximum Printer jobs should be (maximum jobs) –...
  • Page 327 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 328 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Description Switches configurations for sleep modes. Purpose Use this to switch configurations for sleep modes. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to set. Display Description Settings for BAM applicable countries Setting 1.
  • Page 329 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U402 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Press the system menu key. 3. Press the start key to output a test pattern. 4.
  • Page 330 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 331 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Press the system menu key. 3.
  • Page 332 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U404 Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance modes. U039 U034 U402 U403 U404 (P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-40) (P.1-3-167) (P.1-3-168) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-170...
  • Page 333 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying. Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.
  • Page 334 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Description Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either auto- matic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation. Purpose Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped. Method 1.
  • Page 335 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB, ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
  • Page 336 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U411 Display Description Note Select Auto to automatically read and Target Set-up for obtaining the target value enter the target values using the Chart 1 test chart Initial setting: U425 Execute this mode when the Chart 2-2 DP Auto Adj Automatic adjustment of auto- matic document processor using...
  • Page 337 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin- ning ( P.1-3-217).
  • Page 338 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 * : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target values in the following manner and perform adjustment. 1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the chart1original (P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
  • Page 339 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the back of the Chart 2-1 original Chart2-1 (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a Chart 2-1original on the platen. 3. Enter maintenance item U411. 4.
  • Page 340 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP. Cut the trailing edge of the original. 5 mm 149 ± 1 mm 74 ± 1 mm Figure 1-3-46 2. Enter maintenance item U411. 3.
  • Page 341 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U411 Original to be used Display Description for adjustment (P/N) Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243/ ning section (second side) for magnifica- 303JX57010/ tion, leading edge timing, center line, MTF 303JX57020 filter, input gamma and matrix Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243...
  • Page 342 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U411 Method: [DP Auto Adj] 1. Load A4/ letter paper. 2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment. 3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key. 4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up. 5.
  • Page 343 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U411 Error Codes Codes Description DP main scanning direction skew error Main scanning direction magnification error Service call error DP paper misfeed error PWB replacement error Original error Input gamma adjustment original error Matrix adjustment original error Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error Lab value searching error Lab value comparing error...
  • Page 344 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U412 Adjusting the uneven density Description Adjusts the uneven developer/transfer density in the drum axis direction by scanning directly the density distribution of test pattern with the scanner and adjusting LSU light quantity. Purpose To perform when replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
  • Page 345 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U412 Error codes Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Spotted background error scanning direction E003 Density error S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E004 Uneven density error iary scanning direction...
  • Page 346 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U415 Adjusting the print position automatically Description Automatically adjusts timings at the print engine. Adjustment for leading edge timing, center line and margin. Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine. * : Execute this mode when the Chart 2-2 (302AC68243) is not available. Method 1.
  • Page 347 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Setting the target Description Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment. Purpose Perform data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment. Method 1.
  • Page 348 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Display Description White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment...
  • Page 349 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Display Description Setting range Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0 Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0 Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0 Setting: [Adjust Original] * : This setting is usually unnecessary. 1.
  • Page 350 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B and C. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A (30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
  • Page 351 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Method: [Chart2] 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Figure 1-3-53 Display Description Entering the target values of the chart 2-1 (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment Entering the measurement value of the chart 2-2 (P/N: 302AC68243) used for adjustment Execution is not required Method: [CCD]...
  • Page 352 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Display Description N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment...
  • Page 353 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Display Description Setting range Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0 Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0 Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0 Setting: [Adjust Original] * : This setting is usually unnecessary. 1.
  • Page 354 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B and C. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A (30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
  • Page 355 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U425 Setting: [DP] * : This setting is usually unnecessary. 1. Press the start key. 2. Enters the value that is indicated on the Lead 15.0 face of the chart using the +/- keys or Main Scan 15.0 numeric keys.
  • Page 356 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U429 Setting the offset for the color balance Description Displays and changes the density for each color during copying in the various image quality modes. Purpose To change the balance for each color. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 357 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U460 Adjusting the conveying sensor Description Compensates the threshold value of the side multi tray’s multi feed sensor. Purpose If more than one sheet is fed at a time, modify the threshold depending on the environment. Method 1.
  • Page 358 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Item No. Description U460 Setting: [Threshold(Single)/(Multi)] 1. Select the item. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Threshold(Single) Paper feeding threshold settings 0 to 254 Threshold(Multi) Multi feed threshold settings 0 to 254 3.
  • Page 359 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U464 Setting the ID correction operation Description Turn ID correction (calibration) on or off. Also, this allows individual settings for calibration opera- tion. Purpose Implements various settings of calibration when poor image quality is caused or to allow various settings of calibration depending on the user preference.
  • Page 360 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U464 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting: [Time Interval] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Time(sec) Setting the interval time of calibration 0 to 9999 (s) 2.
  • Page 361 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U464 Setting: [Leaving Time] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial Display Description Setting range setting Time(min) Setting the standard time of sleep mode 0 to 480 (min) 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: [Driving Time] 1.
  • Page 362 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U464 Setting: [Print Rate(B/W)] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Threshold Proportion of black/white printing 0 to 100 (%) 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Method: [Calib] 1.
  • Page 363 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U465 Displaying: [TCOUNT] Select [TCOUNT]. The current value is displayed. Display Description Before(C) Developer bias control value for cyan before ID correction Before(M) Developer bias control value for magenta before ID correction Before(Y) Developer bias control value for yellow before ID correction Before(K) Developer bias control value for black before ID correction After(C)
  • Page 364 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U465 Displaying: [Stress] 1. Select [Stress]. The current value is displayed. Display Description Front Intermediate transfer belt durability (Front) Rear Intermediate transfer belt durability (Rear) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U467 Setting the color registration adjustment Description...
  • Page 365 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U468 Checking the color registration data Description Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data. Purpose To check the corresponding data. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be reference. Display Description V Correction...
  • Page 366 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U468 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U469 Adjusting the color registration Description Perform the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction. Purpose To perform when replacing the maintenance kit or laser scanner unit. Method 1.
  • Page 367 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U469 Error codes Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected S004 Original inclination error S002 Original deviation in the main S005 Original type error scanning direction SFFF Scanner other error S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E001 Engine state error iary scanning direction...
  • Page 368 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U469 Method: [Belt Initialize] 1. Select [Execute]. 2. Press the start key. Transfer belt speed correction starts. Method:[Belt Check] 1. Select [Mode].. Display Description Angle Display of cam position Belt Position Display of belt position Mode Operational mode Execute Execution of belt position confirmation...
  • Page 369 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio Description Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode. Purpose To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying. For example, in order to soften the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200% magnification, change the level of compression by raising the value.
  • Page 370 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U470 Setting: [Send] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode Text Compression ratio in the text mode HC-PDF(BG) Compression ratio of high compression PDF HC-PDF(Char) Setting the compression rate of the high-compression PDF (text color) HC-PDF(File Size) Setting the compression rate of the high-compression PDF...
  • Page 371 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U470 Setting: [System] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 3.
  • Page 372 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U474 Setting: [Timing] 1. Select the item. Display Description Print Execute during a Job Print End Execute after a Job has been completed Initial setting: Print End 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key.
  • Page 373 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U485 Setting: [PDF Rotation] 1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys. Display Description Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter Assigns the image rotation with the actual image Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter (CTM rotation) Initial setting: 0 2.
  • Page 374 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Item No. Description U485 Setting: [Color Table 1(Copy)],[Color Table 2(Copy)] 1. Default/Custom printer color tables are shown. 2. Press the appropriate button. 3. Press the target button for switching Display CTYPE_A1 CTYPE_CA CTYPE_FJ CTYPE_KO CTYPE_KY CTYPE_RH CTYPE_SH CTYPE_TO *1: Similar to existing products. *2: Use CTYPE_KY to enable the factory-set color table.
  • Page 375 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U486 Setting color/black and white operation mode Description When color and B/W documents are mixed, sets operation mode after a color document is detected. Purpose To ensure productivity when copying color and B/W documents in ACS mode, select Mode3. However, selecting Mode3 will increase the maintenance count for cyan, magenta, and yellow color developer units even when there is a B/W original after a color original.
  • Page 376 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U486 [Setting:Permission] 1. Press the start key. 2. Select On or Off Display Description Permission : monochrome printing * 1 (3 colors release ) Prohibition : color printing (4-color press) Initial setting: Off * : When the background of printing on envelope is colored , set On. If perform it , there is a possibility that the jitter occurs.
  • Page 377 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U520 Set TDRS Description Perform TDRS settings and information views. Purpose Perform TDRS settings and information views. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Registration Transition to the TDRS Manager registering dialog Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog On/Off Config...
  • Page 378 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U520 Error Codes Codes Description Codes Description e0001 t0001 HDD is unavailable. Fatal error. e0002 t0002 USB memory is unavailable. Error in processing the network. e0003 t0003 The file to import does not exist in An illegal parameter error. the USB.
  • Page 379 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations. Perform backup when the counters on the engine PWB and PF main PWB do not match. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts.
  • Page 380 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations. Purpose To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.

  • Page 381: Maintenance Report

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U903 Detail of history of paper jams Maintenance Report 2013.01.17 08:17 Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.11.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234 Paper Jam Log 2012.12.12 JAM0000 JAM0100 JAM0101 JAM0110 JAM0111 JAM0112 JAM0131 JAM0210 Figure 1-3-65 Description...
  • Page 382 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1.
  • Page 383 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U904 Detail of history of service counts Maintenance Report 2013.01.17 08:17 Firmware version 2N9_2000.000.000 2012.11.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234 Paper Jam Log 2012.12.12 JAM0000 Service Call Log 2012.12.12 C0630 C1000 C1950 C2840 C4300...
  • Page 384 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U905 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the use of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
  • Page 385 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U906 Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sec- tions, and the related parts are serviced. Method 1.
  • Page 386 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Item No. Description U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes. Purpose To check the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. Display Display Description...
  • Page 387 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Item No. Description U917 Setting backup data reading/writing Description Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB memory to the machine. Purpose To store and write data when replacing the HDD or main PWB. Method 1.
  • Page 388 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Item No. Description U917 7. Press the start key. Starts reading or writing. The progress of selected item is displayed in %. When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed. 8. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed. * : Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].
  • Page 389 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts. Purpose To check the copy counts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Main Function Counts of main function Sub Function Counts of sub function [Setting: Main Function] 1.
  • Page 390 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U920 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) Description Resets all of the counts back to zero. Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count val- ues are 1000 or less.
  • Page 391 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count Description Displays the counts of the charger roller counter for checking or clearing. Purpose To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit. To clear the counter value when replacing the charger roller unit.
  • Page 392 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Item No. Description U933 Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log Description Perform individual configuration or log file printing for the date when maintenance mode is entered and exited or for the feature which records the dates when maintenance mode numbers are executed.
  • Page 393 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the document processor is used.
  • Page 394 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Item No. Description U952 Maintenance mode workflow Description The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be executed in succession. Purpose This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template. Setting 1.
  • Page 395 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Item No. Description U952 Method: [Entry] 1. Select [Entry]. 2. Select the area to store workflow. Display Description Data1 - 8 The area to store workflows in the machine 3. Press the +/- keys or numeric keys to assign a maintenance Nbr. into a workflow. Display Description Flow1 - 14...
  • Page 396 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Item No. Description U952 Example Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text/mainte- nance ID (editable) is inserted. File Format: xxx.mwf 1, SET UP, 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278 2, WARRANTY, 089, 000 3, MK-A, 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251 4, MK-B, 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251 5, MK-C, 167, 464, 469, 410, 251...
  • Page 397 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Item No. Description U964 Supplement Instructions on how to obtain a log when the operation panel has frozen Simultaneously press and hold the *, 8, 6, and Clear keys for 3 to 6 seconds to start logging. The memory indicator keeps lighting during a log is generated and goes off when completed. * : The logs obtained in this manner can be retrieved in the USB flash device using the main- tenance mode.
  • Page 398 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U977 Data capture mode Description Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory. Purpose In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine. Method 1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.
  • Page 399 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U984 Checking the developer unit number Description Displays the developer unit number. Purpose To check the developer unit number. Method 1. Press the start key. The developer unit number for each color is displayed. Display Description Cyan developer unit number Magenta developer unit number Yellow developer unit number...
  • Page 400 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U985 Displaying the developer unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter. Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
  • Page 401 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Item No. Description U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light. Purpose To check duration of use of the CIS. Method 1. Press the start key. The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes. Display Description The accumulated time for the CIS to light...
  • Page 402 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 This page is intentionally left blank. 1-3-240...

  • Page 403: Paper Misfeed Detection

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection (1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed mes- sage on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper conveying unit or paper conveying cover.
  • Page 404 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 L-30 H-01 K-22 K-29 I-21 I-20 K-23 K-24 K-27 J-19 G-17 G-18 K-25 K-28 K-26 E-10,15 F-16 D-09 A-02 N-14 E-11 N-06 N-06 B-03 C-05 C-04 O-08 O-07 E-12 M-31 O-13 C-05 O-08 M-33 M-32 A-02 Position code (displayed on the panel) Positions in the individual systems (See below.) Figure 1-4-2 Paper misfeed indication A.

  • Page 405: Paper Misfeed Detection Condition

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) Paper misfeed detection condition Machine + Option1 Figure 1-4-3 Paper jam location (Machine + Option1) 1-4-3...
  • Page 406 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Machine + Option2 Figure 1-4-4 Paper jam location (Matchine + Option2) 1-4-4...
  • Page 407 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 * : This model does not support the following codes: 0132 /0505 /0515 /9030 List of JAM Code Code Contents Conditions location* 0000 Initial jam The power is turned on when a sensor in the convey- ing system is on. 0100 Secondary paper feed Secondary paper feed request given by the controller...
  • Page 408 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 0213 SD cover open The SD cover is opened during printing. 0214 PF paper conveying The PF paper conveying cover (side) is opened during cover (side) open printing. 0215 Side multi tray release The side multi tray is released during printing. 0300 Ejection uncompleted An ejection-completed error has occurred.
  • Page 409 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 0525 No paper feed from cas- SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn on during paper sette 5 feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 0526 No paper feed from cas- PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during sette 6 paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder).
  • Page 410 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 1311 Middle sensor stay jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 1312 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 1313 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
  • Page 411 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 1914 PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn sor 2 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 2106 PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn sor 1 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).
  • Page 412 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Code Contents Conditions location* 2704 PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn sor 2 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). 2707 PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder).
  • Page 413 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 3415 SM paper conveying SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not sensor 1 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 3416 SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).
  • Page 414 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 3615 SM paper conveying SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not sensor 3 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 3616 SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).
  • Page 415 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4011 Registration sensor stay Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4012 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4013 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
  • Page 416 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4112 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4113 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
  • Page 417 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during 4211 Fuser eject sensor stay paper feed from cassette 1. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during 4212 paper feed from cassette 2. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during 4213 paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac- ity feeder).
  • Page 418 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4311 Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4312 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4313 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity...
  • Page 419 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4411 Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4412 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4413 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity...
  • Page 420 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper 4601 Eject full sensor non feed from cassette 1. arrival jam Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper 4602 feed from cassette 2. Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper 4603 feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity...
  • Page 421 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during 4701 Switchback sensor non paper feed from cassette 1. arrival jam Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during 4702 paper feed from cassette 2. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during 4703 paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac- ity feeder).
  • Page 422 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4901 BR conveying sensor 1 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- non arrival jam ing paper feed from cassette 1. 4902 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- ing paper feed from cassette 2.
  • Page 423 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 4918 BR conveying sensor 1 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- stay jam ing paper feed from duplex section. 4919 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- ing paper feed from MP tray. 5001 BR conveying sensor 2 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur-...
  • Page 424 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 5016 BR conveying sensor 2 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- stay jam ing paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder). 5017 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- ing paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder).
  • Page 425 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Code Contents Conditions location* 5111 BR eject sensor stay jam BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 5112 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 5113 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity...
  • Page 426 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 6100 DF paper entry sensor DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned on non arrival jam even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received (4000-sheet finisher). 6101 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received (1000-sheet finisher).
  • Page 427 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 6500 DF eject paper sensor DF eject paper sensor (DFMTS) does not turn on non arrival jam within specified time of DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) turning on. 6510 DF eject paper sensor DF eject paper sensor (DFMTS) is not turned off since stay jam the bundle discharge starts (4000-sheet finisher).
  • Page 428 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Code Contents Conditions location* 7300 CF eject sensor non CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within speci- arrival jam fied time since three fold operation starts. 7310 CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.
  • Page 429 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 9005 No original feed jam 2 DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within speci- fied time of the lift plate rising. 9006 DP switchback jam 3 DP eject sensor (DPES) is not turned on within speci- fied time since original switchback operation starts.
  • Page 430 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Conditions location* 9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within speci- fied time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off. *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). 1-4-28...

  • Page 431: Troubleshooting

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 1-4-2 Troubleshooting (1) First check items If the paper is fed askew, jammed, curled, or leading-edge dog-eared, first perform to check the following items. Check items Check description Corrective measures Paper 1. Check the paper delivered is If a dog-ear has happened, check there are no objects dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, existing in the conveying paths and, if any, fix.
  • Page 432 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check items Check description Corrective measures Paper 8. Check the paper ejected is If the maintenance mode U161 shows that the fuser dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, temperature is set to an abnormal value, reset it to the loosely fused, or curled. default.
  • Page 433 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check items Check description Corrective measures Conveying 1. Check that the foreign If foreign objects such as scrips, etc., remain in the guide, objects including scrips, paper conveying path, remove. approaching paper clips, etc., do not exist guide, feed- in the paper conveying paths.
  • Page 434 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check items Check description Corrective measures Conveying 1. Check the conveying rollers Clean the conveying rollers or the pollyes. roller, feed have no paper dusts, toner, If variation in the external diameter or abrasion is roller or foreign objects observed, replace.
  • Page 435 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check items Check description Corrective measures Static Check if the location is Re-assemble and re-wire the static discharge sheet at susceptible to build static the ejection unit or the metal guide at the tranfer unit so discharge at the conveying guide that they are properly grounded.
  • Page 436 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures No-paper-feed jam or 7. Check the separation If it gets in contact, replace the primary feed unit. the leading edge of roller is not disturbed as paper is curled back at a driving component is the position of the in contact with the roller...
  • Page 437 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Multiple-feed Jam 4. Select the motor by If the clutch rotates following the other component (J0511, J0512, J0513, U032 and check the and its stain is observed, replace the clutch. J0514, J0516, J0517, clutch rotates following J0519) the other component...
  • Page 438 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Conveying sensor non 1. Check to see if the Re-assemble or replace the actuator's return spring. arrival jam (J1503/ actuator is operative J1504) without hinderance. SM conveying sensor 2. Perform U030 to check If the roller won't rotate without hinderance, loosen 2 stay jam (J3415, the operation of the...
  • Page 439 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Duplex sensors 1 and 1. Check that the duplex Clean or replace the duplex roller in the coveying 2, stuck/ non arrival rollers cause slipage in unit. Jam (J43XX, J44XX) feeding paper. 2. Perform U031 to check Replace the defective duplex sensors 1 and 2 or the if the duplex sensors 1 coveying unit.
  • Page 440 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF conveying sensor 2. Check if the jammed 2.If a down-curled sheet is jammed at the DF non arrival jam paper has a dog-ear. conveying guide ribs by being dog-eared, replace the (J610X) DF conveying lower guide.
  • Page 441 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF intermediate sen- 2. Check the range of the If the gap is not correct, fix balance of the bundle sor stay jam (J631X) up and down eject unit. DF main tray ejection movement of the If (1): Correct the phase shifting with meshing of the stay JAM (J641X)
  • Page 442 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures 1. If a wire from the ejection motor is pinched by DF intermediate sen- 4.With stapling at one point other component or a connector is loosely sor stay jam (J631X) with about 65 sheets, check for the failure on connected, correct.
  • Page 443 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF drum sensor stay 1. Check if the size and If not matched, load the paper in the size and jam (J6610) orientation of the orientation configured for the cassette or the manual original document and feed tray.
  • Page 444 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0501,J0511,J1301,J1311,J4001,J4011 Measures Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) Registration sensor (RS) Paper feed clutch 1(PFCL1) Engine PWB (EPWB) Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1)
  • Page 445 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J13X1 (terminal), point of checking connection J13X Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 Middle sensor (MS) : Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-9 check, operation check (U031) Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1)
  • Page 446 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 2 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0502,J0512,J1302,J1312,J1502,J1512,J4002,J4012 Corrective Action Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB) Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2) Assist clutch 2 (ACSL2)
  • Page 447 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J13X2 (terminal), point of checking connection J13X2 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 Middle sensor (MS) : Conduct connectivity check, mounting location, Feed PWB 2 YC8-9 check operation check (U031) Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):...
  • Page 448 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J40X2 (terminal), point of checking connection J40X2 Registration clutch (RCL) Registration motor (RM) : Operation Feed PWB 1 YC22-2 / YC25-1 to 4 check (U032/30) Feed PWB 1 : Replace Engine PWB : Replace...
  • Page 449 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J05X9 (terminal), point of checking connection J05X9 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 MP feed sensor (MPFS): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC17-9 check, operation check (U031) Manual feed conveying clutch (CL):...
  • Page 450 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J0131 (terminal), point of checking connection J0131 MP lift sensors 1 and 2: Check for Relay PWB (YC3-5, YC3-8) (YC12) connection and the position of the sensor to be mounted.
  • Page 451 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0508,J0518 Corrective Action Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) * : 30 ppm model /35 ppm model Engine PWB (EPWB) only.
  • Page 452 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part Timing of detection Jam code J410x,J411x Corrective Action Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB) * : 30 ppm model /35 ppm model Secondary transfer roller - transfers the Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) drive from the transfer belt Registration clutch (RCL)
  • Page 453 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject part Timing of detection Jam code J420x,J421x,J460x,J461x,J470x,J471x Corrective Action Related parts Fuser motor (FUM) Engine PWB (EPWB) Eject motor (EM) Front PWB (FRPWB) Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) Fuser eject sensor (FUES) Eject full sensor (EFS) Switchback sensor (SBS)
  • Page 454 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J46XX (terminal), point of checking connection J46XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 Eject full sensor (EFS) : Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC5-16 check, operation check (U031) feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift...
  • Page 455 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part Timing of detection Jam code J430x,J431x,J440x,J441x Corrective Action Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB) * : 30 ppm model /35 ppm model Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1) Relay PWB (RYPWB) * : In paper conveying unit Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)
  • Page 456 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J44XX (terminal), point of checking connection J44XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) : Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC14-5 check, operation check (U031) Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)
  • Page 457 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part Timing of detection Jam code J490x,J491x,J500x,J501x,J510x,J511x Corrective Action Related parts BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) Engine PWB (EPWB) BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) BR PWB (BRPWB) BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) BR eject sensor (BRES)
  • Page 458 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J50XX (terminal), point of checking connection J50XX Engine PWB : Replace Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J51XX (terminal), point of checking connection...
  • Page 459 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry,feedshift and subtray left eject part Timing of detection Jam code J610x,J611x,J620x,J621x,J630x,J631x Corrective Action Related parts DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL) DF middle motor (DFMM) DP main PWB (DFMPWB) DF eject motor (DFEM) BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1)
  • Page 460 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J62XX (terminal), point of checking connection J62XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-29 DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) : Conduct connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC21-3 check, operation check (U241) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):...
  • Page 461 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part Timing of detection Jam code J6500,J651x,J6600,J6610 Corrective Action Related parts DF middle motor (DFMM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB) DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS) DF drum sensor (DFDRS) DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL) Checking...
  • Page 462 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J66XX (terminal), point of checking connection J66XX DF drum motor (DFDRM) : Operation DF main PWB YC18-1 to 4 check (U240) DF main PWB(DFMPWB) : Replace (13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part Timing of detection Jam code...
  • Page 463 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part Timing of detection Jam code J6710,J7700,J7710 Corrective Action Related parts DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB) CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) CF PWB (CFPWB) DF drum sensor (DFDRS) CF conveying sensor (CFPCS) Checking procedure at the...

  • Page 464: Self-Diagnostic Function

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function (1) Self-diagnostic function 1. This machine is equipped with self- diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops printing and display the dialog to retrieve the relevant information in a log. (Self-diag- nostic dialog) * : Be sure not to turn power off until the dialog has gone off.

  • Page 465: Self Diagnostic Codes

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) Self diagnostic codes If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement Caution: Before attempting to check the power supply, fuser unit, and the IH controller PWB, be sure to turn the power switch off and unplug the machine from power.
  • Page 466 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after 0150 Backup memory read/write EEPROM(Engine error (engine PWB) PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on. No response is issued from 2. Check that the EEPROM is peroperly the device in reading/writing installed on the engine PWB and re- for 5 ms or more and this...
  • Page 467 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Install the FAX image DIMM supplied in 0620 FAX image DIMM error FAX image DIMM 1. The Fax image DIMM has the FAX system onto the main PWB. not been installed. 2.
  • Page 468 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the 0640 Hard disk error The hard disk cannot be HDD, replace the HDD. accessed. 2. Check the SATA wiring between the HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose connection, disconnection and damages, and that it is connected into the correct terminal.
  • Page 469 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U004 if this occurs after the 0660 Hard disk encryption key EEPROM error EEPROM has been changed. 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the HDD, replace the HDD. 2.
  • Page 470 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Make sure that the back-up batteries on 0840 Faults of RTC Battery ( main (“Time for maintenance T” is PWB) the main PWB are not short-circuited. displayed) 2. Reset Maintenance T by executing [Check at power up] U906 (see page 1-3-223).
  • Page 471 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Manual feed lift 1. Check that the paper lift base of the 1000 MP lift motor error If the MP lift sensor 1 (upper base elevating manual feed tray can smoothly ascend limit detect) or 2 (bottom mechanism and descent, if not, repair or replace.
  • Page 472 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1010 Lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be After cassette 1 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or sensor 1 does not turn on replace.
  • Page 473 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1020 Lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be After cassette 2 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or sensor 2 does not turn on replace.
  • Page 474 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1030 PF lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be (paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 3 is inserted, replace. mechanism PF lift sensor 1 does not turn PF Lift motor 1...
  • Page 475 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1040 PF lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be (paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 4 is inserted, replace. mechanism PF lift sensor 2 does not turn PF Lift motor 2...
  • Page 476 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1050 SM lift motor error Check that the cassette base can be (side multi tray) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or [45 ppm/55 ppm model] replace. mechanism After cassette 5 is inserted, SM Lift motor 1.
  • Page 477 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1060 PF lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be (side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or [45 ppm/55 ppm model] replace. mechanism After cassette 6 is inserted, PF Lift motor 1...
  • Page 478 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1070 PF lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be (side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or [45 ppm/55 ppm model] replace. mechanism After cassette 7 is inserted, PF Lift motor2...
  • Page 479 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1100 PF lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be (large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 3 is inserted, replace.
  • Page 480 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1110 PF lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be (large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 4 is inserted, replace.
  • Page 481 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1140 SD lift motor error Check that the cassette base can be (side deck) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 5 is inserted, replace. mechanism SD lift sensor does not turn on SD Lift motor...
  • Page 482 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures SM multi feed 1. Check that the sensor is correctly 1350 SM multi feed sensor error (side multi tray) sensor positioned. [45 ppm/55 ppm model] 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is The SM multi feed sensor has firmly connected and, if necessary, detected multi feeding 5 times...
  • Page 483 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures The side multi tray 1710 Side multi tray incompatible Install the side multi-tray with the target detection error is installed with a model. [30 ppm/35 ppm model] device to which it is The side multi tray has been incompatible.
  • Page 484 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Side paper feeder 1820 Side paper feeder communi- Check the wiring connection status with the cation error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it [45 ppm/55 ppm model] again. A communication error from SM main PWB 1.
  • Page 485 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 1950 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer belt sen- unit EEPROM error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Engine PWB (YC27) and RFID PWB for 5 ms or more and this...
  • Page 486 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the developer waste lock has 2103 Developer motor MCY error Developer unit After developer motor MCY is been released and, if not, release the driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-15).

  • Page 487: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2201 Drum motor K steady-state Drum unit error Motor) and check that the drum motor After drum motor K is stabi- can rotate (see page 1-3-34). lized, the ready signal is at the 2.

  • Page 488: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2202 Drum motor C steady-state Drum unit error Motor) and check that the drum motor [45 ppm/55 ppm model] can rotate (see page 1-3-34). After drum motor C is stabi- 2.
  • Page 489 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2203 Drum motor MCY steady- Drum unit state error Motor) and check that the drum motor [30 ppm/35 ppm model] can rotate (see page 1-3-34). After drum motor MCY is sta- 2.
  • Page 490 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2203 Drum motor M steady-state Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). [45 ppm/55 ppm model] (see page 1-3-34). After drum motor M is stabi- 2.
  • Page 491 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2211 Drum motor K startup error Drum unit Drum motor K is not stabilized U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-34).
  • Page 492 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2212 Drum motor C startup error Drum unit [45 ppm/55 ppm model] U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). Drum motor C is not stabilized (see page 1-3-34). within 5 s since the motor is 2.
  • Page 493 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2213 Drum motor MCY startup Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). [30 ppm/35 ppm model] (see page 1-3-34). Drum motor MCY is not stabi- 2.
  • Page 494 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2213 Drum motor M startup error Drum unit [45 ppm/55 ppm model] Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030 Drum motor M is not stabilized motor operation check within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-34).
  • Page 495 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2300 Fuser motor error Fuser motor After fuser motor is driven, the U030 Fuser (fuser motor) ready signal does not turn to L (see page 1-3-34). within 2 s.
  • Page 496 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2600 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed (large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 LCF- Motor ON (see page 1- After PF paper feed motor is 3-148).

  • Page 497: Replace The Sm Main Pwb (Refer To The Service Manual For The Paper Feeder)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2640 SD paper feed motor error SD paper feed (side deck) motor cute U247 Side deck- Motor ON (see [45 ppm/55 ppm model] page 1-3-148).
  • Page 498 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2660 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed (side large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 Side LCF - Motor ON (see [45 ppm/55 ppm model] page 1-3-148).
  • Page 499 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2700 3-color release motor error Color release When the color release motor motor U30 CMY Release (see page 1-3-34). is driven, the color release Color release sen- 2.
  • Page 500 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 2730 1. The main-unit access drawer of the Paper conveying unit paper conveying unit has no foreign objects adhered or no distorted pins and, if necessary, repair. 2. Check the paper conveying unit is firmly closed.
  • Page 501 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2760 Transfer motor startup error Transfer motor is not stabi- U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34). lized within 5 s since the 2.

  • Page 502: Intermediate Transfer Belt

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer belt skew 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 2780 Intermediate transfer belt skew correction sensor sensor firmly connected and, if necessary, error (Intermediate connect the connector all the way in. An abnormal value is detected transfer belt unit) intermediate transfer belt unit and...

  • Page 503: To Check The Motor Operation, Execute

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Waste toner box 1. Rotate the waste toner spiral by the 2810 Inner waste toner motor error hand and check that they are not Initialized when an error is unusually loaded. constantly observed for 2 sec- 2.
  • Page 504 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer cleaning 1. Rotate the roller and the drive gear by 2840 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning motor error motor the hand and check that they are not After transfer cleaning motor unusually loaded.

  • Page 505: Check That The Sensor Is Correctly Positioned

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer belt 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2860 Intermediate transfer belt sub sensor error sensor U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34). The signal is not received for 2. Check that the drive roller for the sensor 100 ms in succession.
  • Page 506 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures The scanner mirror 3100 Scanner carriage error Check whether the scanner mirror frame has The home position is not cor- frame is being been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see rect when the power is turned page 1-2-10).
  • Page 507 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 3210 CIS lamp error When input value at the time Release (see page 1-3-223). of CIS illumination does not 2. Execute CCD of U061 lamp check (see exceed the threshold value page 1-3-55).
  • Page 508 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures LED lamp PWB 1. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD 3300 Optical system (AGC) error One of the gains is FF or 0x89 (see page 1-3-55). during the CCD lamp AGC is 2.
  • Page 509 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Scanner sequence error ISC PWB 1. Execute U021 memory initializing (see 3600 page 1-3-31). 2. Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411 (see page 1-3-173). Scanner device error CCD (ISU) 3700 Since the ISU is mounted with a CCD of different type, install the ISU that matches with the model.
  • Page 510 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4002 Polygon motor C synchroni- zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor C is connect the connector all the way in. driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB not turn to L within 30 s.
  • Page 511 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4011 Polygon motor K steady- state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor K is stabi- connect the connector all the way in. lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB H level for 15 s continuously.
  • Page 512 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4014 Polygon motor Y steady- state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor Y is stabi- connect the connector all the way in. lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB H level for 15 s continuously.
  • Page 513 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures PD PWB M (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is 4103 BD initialization error M After polygon motor M is not distorted and connect the FFC wiring driven, the BD signal is not all the way in.
  • Page 514 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures PD PWB C (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is 4202 BD steady-state error C The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FFC wiring all the way in. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB...

  • Page 515: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1- 4300 Polygon motor phase error ASIC won’t settle in comple- 5-43). tion of phase adjustment for 2 Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade s after a BD signal is to the latest, if necessary.
  • Page 516 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5101 Main high-voltage error K Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
  • Page 517 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5102 Main high-voltage error C Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
  • Page 518 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5103 Main high-voltage error M Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).

  • Page 519: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5104 Main high-voltage error Y Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).

  • Page 520: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present. 6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser thermistor 1 does not 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is reach 100° C/212 °F even firmly connected and, if necessary, after 60 s during warming up.
  • Page 521 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present. 6030 Broken fuser center therm- istor 1 wire 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary, istor 1 is 1010 or more (A/D connect the connector all the way in.
  • Page 522 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6040 Fuser heater error Input from fuser thermistor 1 firmly connected and, if necessary, is abnormal value continu- connect the connector all the way in. ously for 1 s.
  • Page 523 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Power source 1. Check that the operating voltage falls 6050 Abnormally low fuser center thermistor 1 temperature within +/-10%. Fuser center thermistor 1 2. Check no voltage drop is caused. The detects a temperature lower heater is deactivated at 70V or lower.
  • Page 524 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6120 Abnormally high fuser press thermistor 4 tempera- firmly connected and, if necessary, ture connect the connector all the way in. Fuser press thermistor 4 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) detects a temperature higher 2.
  • Page 525 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6150 Abnormally low fuser press thermistor 4 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser press thermistor 4 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 30°C/86°F for 1 s after...
  • Page 526 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 6200 Broken fuser edge heater 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is wire firmly connected and, if necessary, con- Fuser edge thermistor 2 does nect the connector all the way in. not reach 100°...
  • Page 527 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6220 Abnormally high fuser edge thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature higher Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 245°C/473°F for 1 s.
  • Page 528 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6230 Broken fuser edge thermis- tor 2 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, The Input signal from the connect the connector all the way in. fuser edge thermistor 2 is 992 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) or more (A/D value) continu-...
  • Page 529 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6250 Abnormally low fuser edge thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 100°C/212°F for 1 s dur-...
  • Page 530 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6320 Abnormally high fuser mid- dle thermistor 3 tempera- firmly connected and, if necessary, ture connect the connector all the way in. Fuser middle thermistor 3 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) detects a temperature higher...
  • Page 531 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6600 Fuser belt rotation error Fuser motor A belt rotating pulse is not U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-34). received for 1 s. 2. Check that the drive gear can rotate and (Engine CPU) not heavily loaded and, if necessary, apply grease to the axle holder and...
  • Page 532 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6610 Fuser release sensor error Fuser release The fusing pressure release U030 Fuser Release (see page 1-3-34). motor sensor won’t send an off sig- 2.
  • Page 533 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6720 Fuser IH belt rotation error Fuser motor While driving, the pulse count U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-34). is less than 3 for 2 seconds 2.
  • Page 534 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6730 Abnormally high fuser IH Fuser IH PWB PWB temperature 1 (IGBT1) firmly connected and, if necessary, The input detect temperature connect the connector all the way in. is higher than 115°C/221 °F.
  • Page 535 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6750 Fuser IH output over-cur- Fuser IH PWB rent error firmly connected and, if necessary, The output current of IH CPU connect the connector all the way in. is higher than 90A for 10 ms in Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB succession.
  • Page 536 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6770 Fuser IH low electric power Fuser unit error firmly connected and, if necessary, Less than 0.6 times of the pre- connect the connector all the way in. set power is detected for 120 Fuser unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC6) ms in succession after the IH...
  • Page 537 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe- 6900 Fuser belt cooling fan error Fuser edge fan When the fuser edge fan cute U037 Fuser Edge (see page 1-3- motor 1, 2 motor 1 , 2 is driven, alarm 43).
  • Page 538 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe- 6930 Fuser rear fan motor error Fuser rear fan When the fuser rear fan motor cute U037 Fuser Coling (see page 1-3- motor is driven, alarm signal is 43).
  • Page 539 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 6950 Fuser IH PWB communica- 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is Power source PWB tion error firmly connected and, if necessary, con- No response is received in 30 nect the connector all the way in. ms since a command is sent Power source PWB (YC9) and Feed to IHCPU.

  • Page 540: Check The Drive Gear Can Rotate Or They Are Not Unusually Loaded And, If Necessary, Replace

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 6990 Fuser power supply incom- Differences in When this has happened after initialization patibility settings after using U021, make settings identical with the Information won’t match initialization voltages on the IH PWB using U169 (see between the engine backup page 1-3-31,1-3-231).

  • Page 541: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7002 Toner motor C error Toner container C A state that the pulse is not container can be rotated by the hand. detected at the pulse sensor 2.
  • Page 542 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7003 Toner motor M error Toner container M A state that the pulse is not container can be rotated by the hand. detected at the pulse sensor 2.
  • Page 543 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7004 Toner motor Y error Toner container Y A state that the pulse is not container can be rotated by the hand. detected at the pulse sensor 1.
  • Page 544 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7101 Toner sensor K error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
  • Page 545 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7102 Toner sensor C error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
  • Page 546 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7103 Toner sensor M error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
  • Page 547 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7104 Toner sensor Y error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
  • Page 548 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139 7200 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature sensor 2 wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- sensor 2 The sensor input sampling is 3-98). greater than 230. 2.
  • Page 549 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7221 Broken LSU thermistor K LSU thermistor K wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-98). greater than 230. 2.
  • Page 550 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7223 Broken LSU thermistor M LSU thermistor M wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-98). greater than 230. 2.
  • Page 551 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7231 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor K istor K temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-98). less than 69. 2.
  • Page 552 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7233 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor M istor M temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-98). less than 69. 2.
  • Page 553 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7241 Broken developer thermis- Developer tor K wire U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor K The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-98). greater than 230. 2.
  • Page 554 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7243 Broken developer thermis- Developer tor M wire U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor M The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-98). greater than 230. 2.
  • Page 555 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7251 Short-circuited developer Developer thermistor K U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor K The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-98). less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and, if necessary, connect the connector all the way in.
  • Page 556 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7253 Short-circuited developer Developer thermistor M U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor M The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-98). less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and, if necessary, con- nect the connector all the way in.
  • Page 557 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7401 Developer unit K type mis- Different type of the Install the developer unit of the correct type. match error developer unit is Improper adaptation of the installed. machine and developer unit K 1.

  • Page 558: Feed Pwb1 (Yc1) And Engine Pwb (Yc6)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID 7601 ID sensor 1 error ID sensor1 (front) An abnormal value is detected compensation operation and check the in the input data to ID sensor displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for ID compensation reference.
  • Page 559 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7800 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature sensor 1 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, sensor 1 connect the connector all the way in. The device did not respond for Outer temperature sensor 1 and Front more than 5 ms during PWB (YC19)
  • Page 560 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7902 Drum C EEPROM error DR PWB- C No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary, the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in. for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB- C and Front PWB (YC12) problem is repeated five times...
  • Page 561 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7911 Developer unit K EEPROM Developer unit K error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Developer unit K and Front PWB (YC9) for 5 ms or more and this...
  • Page 562 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7913 Developer unit M EEPROM Developer unit M error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Developer unit M and Front PWB (YC11) for 5 ms or more and this...
  • Page 563 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is 7941 Laser scanner unit K APC PWB K EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring [35 ppm/ 45 ppm/ 55 ppm all the way in.
  • Page 564 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is 7943 Laser scanner unit M APC PWB M EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring [35 ppm/ 45 ppm/ 55 ppm all the way in.
  • Page 565 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8010 Punch motor 1 error Punch motor When the punch motor is the finisher operation (see page 1-3- driven, punch home position 134). sensor does not turn on within 2.
  • Page 566 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8020 Punch motor 2 error Punch motor Home position is not obtained the finisher operation (see page 1-3- in 3 s after home position is 134).
  • Page 567 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8030 Punch motor 3 error Punch motor Home position does not turn the finisher operation (see page 1-3- from On to Off in 50 ms after 134).
  • Page 568 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Beat to check the 8090 DF paddle motor error DF paddle motor When the DF paddle motor is finisher operation (see page 1-3-134). driven, DF paddle sensor 2.
  • Page 569 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute Motor - Eject Unlock (Full) of 8100 DF eject release motor error DF eject release When the DF eject release U240 finisher operation check (see page motor motor is driven, DF bundle DF bundle 1-3-134).
  • Page 570 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check 8110 DF shift motor 1 error DF shift motor 1 (4000-sheet finisher) the finisher operation (see page 1-3- [front] DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on 134).
  • Page 571 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check 8120 DF shift motor 2 error DF shift motor 2 (4000-sheet finisher) the finisher operation (see page 1-3- [rear] DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on 134).
  • Page 572 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that cancelling the maintenance 8130 DF shift release motor error DF shift release (4000-sheet finisher) mode after executing U240 Motor - Sort motor When the DF shift release for the finisher operation check lets the motor is driven, DF shift rear and forth cursors return to the home release sensor does not turn...
  • Page 573 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8140 DF tray motor error 1 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-134). ascended, DF tray sensor 1 or 2.
  • Page 574 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8150 DF tray motor error 2 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-134). descended, DF tray sensor 1 2.
  • Page 575 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8160 DF tray motor error 3 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-134). descended, DF tray sensor 3 2.
  • Page 576 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8170 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration error 1 check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 When initial operation, DF 1-3-134).

  • Page 577: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8180 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration error 2 check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 JAM6810 ( jam in front of 1-3-134).

  • Page 578: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8190 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration error 1 check the finisher operation (see page motor 2 When initial operation, DF 1-3-134).

  • Page 579: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8200 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration error 2 check the finisher operation (see page motor 2 JAM6910 ( jam in rear of width 1-3-134).

  • Page 580: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Staple Move to 8210 DF slide motor error DF slide motor When initial operation, DF sta- check the finisher operation (see page ple sensor does not turn on 1-3-134).

  • Page 581: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Remove the staple unit and check that 8230 DF staple motor error 1 DF staple motor stapling is possible without a jam. Staple JAM (DF) has been 2. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is detected twice in a row.

  • Page 582: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Remove the staple unit and check that 8240 DF staple motor error 2 DF staple motor Staple JAM (DF) has been stapling is possible without a jam. detected twice in a row. 2.

  • Page 583: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Set to check the 8300 Center-folding unit commu- CF unit set switch nication error finisher switch (see page 1-3-136). (4000-sheet finisher) 2. Check that the switch and its mounting Communication with the cen- bracket are correctly positioned.

  • Page 584: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Bundle Up / Down 8320 CF adjustment motor error CF adjustment (4000-sheet finisher) to check the finisher operation (see page motor1,2 When initial operation, CF 1-3-134). adjustment sensor does not 2.

  • Page 585: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Blade to check 8330 CF blade motor error CF blade motor (4000-sheet finisher) the finisher operation (see page 1-3- When initial operation, CF 134). blade sensor does not turn on 2.
  • Page 586 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Width Test to 8350 CF side registration motor 1 CF side registration error check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 (4000-sheet finisher) 1-3-134). When initial operation, CF 2.
  • Page 587 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Folding to check 8360 CF main motor error CF main motor (4000-sheet finisher) the finisher operation (see page 1-3- During driving the motor, the 134). lock signal is detected for 1 s 2.
  • Page 588 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to 8410 Punch slide motor error 1 Punch slide motor The punch slide sensor won’t check the finisher operation (see page turn On when home position 1-3-134).
  • Page 589 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to 8420 Punch slide motor error 2 Punch slide motor In detection of paper edges, check the finisher operation (see page the paper edge cannot be 1-3-134).
  • Page 590 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 8430 Punch unit communication Punch PWB error firmly connected and, if necessary, Communication with the connect the connector all the way in. punch unit is not possible. Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) (4000-sheet finisher) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB...
  • Page 591 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute Mail Box - Conv of U240 8520 MB conveying motor error 2 MB conveying (4000-sheet finisher) finisher operation check (see page 1-3- motor When standby operation, MB 134). home position sensor does 2.
  • Page 592 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 8800 Document finisher main DF main PWB program error firmly connected and, if necessary, Document finisher main pro- connect the connector all the way in. gram error at power up.
  • Page 593 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the versions of the main unit 9000 Document processor com- DP main PWB munication error firmware and the DP firmware are Communication with the docu- identical. ment processor is not possi- 2.
  • Page 594 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 9040 DP lift motor going up error DP lift motor When the DP lift motor is Release (see page 1-3-223). driven, DP lift sensor 1 does 2.
  • Page 595 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 9050 DP lift motor going down DP lift motor error Release (see page 1-3-223). When the DP lift motor is 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP driven, DP lift sensor 2 does motor operation (see page 1-3-139).

  • Page 596: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute CIS automatic original 9080 LED fault detection DP CIS A block is existent below a document alignment by U411 (see page peak which was obtained by 1-3-173). activating the LEDs in the four 2.
  • Page 597 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 9140 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy. change (Yen 100) change tube Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change change is enough.
  • Page 598 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures ISC PWB error C 1. Reinsert the connector if it its connection 9520 Main PWB is loose. ISC PWB Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4) 2. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5- 72).
  • Page 599 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after F000 Communication error Main PWB between main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on. operation PWB 2. Check that the wirings and connetors between the main circuit PWB and the operation circuit PWB and between the main circuit PWB and the HDD are...

  • Page 600: Check The Engine Software And Upgrade To The Latest, If Necessary

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after F040 Communication error Main PWB between Main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on. Print engine 2. Repair or replace the wire from the engine PWB, that may be grounded.

  • Page 601: System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline The document is subscribed to describe the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in service manual. Please utilize it to refer to checking the factors. Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
  • Page 602 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD) and connectors and check function. 2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check function.
  • Page 603 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 [DDR2 memory contact check] F21X 1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function. Main board:YS1 or YS3 2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) A certain part of the memory be F22X 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory...
  • Page 604 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 *The F46F is printer process 1) Replace the main board and check function. error. if it repeats with a An error is detected at the F46X 2) Retrieve the USBLOG certain print data, retrieve Print image process section (or retrieve the print capture data by case)
  • Page 605 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) F64X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory F65X An error is detected at the and check function.

  • Page 606: Image Formation Problems

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-4 Image formation problems Isolate the component an image defect has occurred from. <A guide to isolate the component of the cause.> Run U089 to print a test page and check whether an image defect happens. YES: Main unit as the cause of defect NO: Scanner as the cause of defect Perform enlarged or reduced copying and verify if the defective images are enlarged or reduced, accordingly.
  • Page 607 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Printing data from PC : Printer Main PWB Main PWB Engine LSU relay Driver (DDR mem- → HDD → (DDR mem- → LSU → → → FAX (send) LED lump Main Main → → → HDD → → FAX PWB →...
  • Page 608 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading) (1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- (entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.

  • Page 609: No Image Appears (Entirely White)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off. glass is mounted. FFC cable CCD Reinsert the connector if it its connection is Check the FFC cable between loose.
  • Page 610 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are document. reversed, place the original document properly. Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
  • Page 611 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are document. reversed, place the original document properly. Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.

  • Page 612: No Image Appears (Entirely Black)

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) No image appears (entirely black). Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose.
  • Page 613 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.

  • Page 614: Image Is Too Light

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Image is too light. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image sity quality that suits the original docuemt in...
  • Page 615 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1.
  • Page 616 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if adjustment of den- ment of density.
  • Page 617 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate. Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is sensor position sensor is mounted.

  • Page 618: The Background Is Colored

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) The background is colored. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense.
  • Page 619 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense.
  • Page 620 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense.

  • Page 621: White Streaks Are Printed Vertically

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire. properly connected. Or, verify conduction of the wire.
  • Page 622 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check whether the lens cover is Re-mount the lens cover if it is hanged off. hanged off. Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the shading position.
  • Page 623 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
  • Page 624 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU PWB and perform U411. (see page 1-3-173) Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) (6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example 1.
  • Page 625 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the shading position. If it does not cure, replace the contact glass assembly. (see page 1-3-55) ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective.
  • Page 626 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the shading position. If it does not cure, replace the contact glass assembly. (see page 1-3-55) ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective.
  • Page 627 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct...

  • Page 628: Streaks Are Printed Horizontally

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Streaks are printed horizontally. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
  • Page 629 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
  • Page 630 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
  • Page 631 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or...
  • Page 632 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411. (see page 1-3-173) CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411. (see page 1-3-173) Main PWB The main PWB is defective.
  • Page 633 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411. (see page 1-3-71,1-3-173) Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action...
  • Page 634 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Black or color dots appear on the image. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
  • Page 635 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely PWB is properly connected.

  • Page 636: Image Is Blurred

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (10) Image is blurred. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Rail Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly, smoothly operative. remove foreign objects on the front and back optical rails. Lamp unit Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly...
  • Page 637 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off. Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
  • Page 638 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller and springs.

  • Page 639: The Leading Edge Of The Image Is Consistently Misaligned With The Original

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
  • Page 640 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP drive motor Check whether the DP drive If the DP motor is fluctuated in rotation, apply motor is fluctuated in rotation. grease with the drive gear. If no improvement is observed, replace the motor. 3.
  • Page 641 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (12) Part of image is missing. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly. glass.
  • Page 642 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-72) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly in the DP.
  • Page 643 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure, removal removal. change it to a smaller value. DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose.

  • Page 644: Image Is Out Of Focus

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (13) Image is out of focus. Print example 1. Table scanning and DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is wavy, straighten.Or, document is wavy. replace the original document. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dew condensed, remove...
  • Page 645 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-173) DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off. is mounted.

  • Page 646: Image Center Does Not Align With The Original Center

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (14) Image center does not align with the original center. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
  • Page 647 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS . scanner of DP scanning. (see page 1-3-65) 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP Auto Adj. 3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP FaceDown (Chart1)_All.
  • Page 648 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Wire rope Confirm that the wire rope has a If a foreign object exists on the wire rope, foreign object sticked or has a remove the foreign object. Or, if it is damaged, scuff.
  • Page 649 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP hinge If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not Check that the DP hinge is held stably open, replace the hinges. operative in both ascending and descending directions and kept open.
  • Page 650 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Scopper guide Check that the scopper guide is If the scopper guide does not rotate smoothly, smoothly operative. re-install. Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean. (before and after roller is dirty.
  • Page 651 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (16) Moire Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode. mode.

  • Page 652: Skewed Image

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode. mode.
  • Page 653 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP feed roller Check whether the feed roller is If the feed roller is dirty, clean.Or, if not cured, dirty. replace the feed roller. DP regist roller Check whether the DP regist If the DP regist roller is dirty, clean. roller is dirty.
  • Page 654 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or has creases or foldings or creases, remove them. wrinkles. Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
  • Page 655 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action SATA cable ISC Reinsert the connector if its connection is Check the SATA cable between loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire. the ISC PWB and main PWB is properly connected. Or, verify conduction of the wire.
  • Page 656 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire. properly connected. Or, verify conduction of the wire.
  • Page 657 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: Mono-color printer engine) (1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- (entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
  • Page 658 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 (16) Grainy image. See page1-4-272 1-4-256...
  • Page 659 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example Cause of trouble 1. No or defective developing bias output. 2. Failure of the rotation of the developing roller. 3. Defective primary transfer. 4. Laser is not dispersed from the laser scanner unit (LSU). 5.
  • Page 660 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Laser scanner unit Check the connection of the con- 1. Reinsert the FFC wire if it its connection is (LSU) nectors. loose. Or, verify conduction of the Replace the cable if it has no conduction. wires.
  • Page 661 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) No image appears (entirely black). Print example Cause of trouble 1. No main charging. 2. The laser from the LSU is activated simultaneously for all colors. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Charging roller Check whether the charging If the charging roller is not fixed properly, fix the roller is properly mounted.
  • Page 662 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Image is too light. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Variance in environments (dew formation). 2. Toner is under supplied, or deteriorated in quality.(Under charged) 3. The volatage of the developing bias is too low. 4. The volatage of the primary transfer current is too low. 5.
  • Page 663 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Toner container Shake the toner container up If the message prompting toner replenishing is and down approx. 10 times, and shown, the toner inlet is not open, replace the check the following: toner container. 1.
  • Page 664 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) The background is colored. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Toner is deteriorated in quality (under-charged). 2. Toner is over-supplied. 3. Developing bias is too high. 4. The layer of toner is too thick on the developing roller (too much toner). 5.
  • Page 665 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action High-voltage The developing bias and charg- Replace the high-voltage PWB1. PWB1 ing current supplied by the high- (see page 1-5-88) voltage PWB1 is faulty. Engine PWB The engine PWB is defective. Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-80) Toner supply motor Check if the toner supply motor If the harnesses are short-circuited and the is continuously rotating.Check...
  • Page 666 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (5) White streaks are printed vertically. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty LSU slit glass. 2. Foreign objects inside the developer unit. 3. Internal contamination 4. Dirty drum unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check if the LSU slit glass is If the LSU slit glass is dirty, dirty.
  • Page 667 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty charging roller 2. Flawed or dirty drum unit 3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade Defective part Check description Corrective Action Charging roller unit Check if there is no toner streaks If the charging roller has streaks on its surface, on the surface of the charging clean the charging roller.
  • Page 668 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty developer unit or terminals 2. Flawed or dirty drum unit Improper grounding 3. Dirty primary transfer roller terminals Defective part Check description Corrective Action Developer unit 1.
  • Page 669 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (8) Uneven density longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty LSU inside 2. The transfer belt is not pressed against the drum properly. 3. Drum condensation. Defective part Check description Corrective Action The emission of laser dispersed Replace the LSU.(Perform U119) from the LSU is not even.
  • Page 670 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Uneven density horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective laser scanner unit. 2. Improper charging roller rotation 3. Improper contact on the developer unit terminals Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check if the emission of laser is Replace the LSU.

  • Page 671: Offset Occurs

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Developer unit 1. Check if that the developing Execute AC calibration by U140. bias is leaked. (see page 1-3-99) 2. Check the print image on 1. If the print image on paper has a problem paper has a problem at an at an interval equivalent to the interval equivalent to the...
  • Page 672 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (12) Part of Image is missing. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Flawed or dirty drum unit. 2. Deformed or dirty primary transfer roller on its surface. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the...
  • Page 673 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 (14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Poor image adjustment. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Image adjustment Check if color adjustment is Execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration insufficient. and U410 Grayscale Adjustment. (see page 1- 3-99,1-3-172) (15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.Colored spots in the printed objects.

  • Page 674: Grainy Image

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper Check if paper is of high surface Change the paper to another. resistance. (16) Grainy image. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Installation at a high altitude. 2. Using the paper with high surface resistance. Defective part Check description Corrective Action...
  • Page 675 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-7 Poor image (Caused by transferring toner, paper conveying, or fusing : Four-color printer engine) (1) No image (2) Image is too (3) The back- (4) White streaks (5) Black or color appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- streaks appear (entirely white).
  • Page 676 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (14) Image is partly (15)Fusing is loose. (16) Image is out of (17)Image center missing focus. does not align with (Outlines the original center. objects and white dots). See page1-4-286 See page1-4-287 See page1-4-288 See page1-4-288 (18)Dirty paper edges with toner. (19)Inferior color (20)Shifted colors.
  • Page 677 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective secondary transfer bias output. 2. The secondary transfer roller is not pressurized. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Secondary transfer Check if the right side conveying If the conveying unit has not been closed, roller unit is closed.
  • Page 678 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Image is too light. Print example Cause of trouble 1. The paper absorbs moisture. 2. The contact pressure at the secondary trasnfer roller and the intermediate transfer belt is too low. 3. The voltage applied to the secondary transfer current is incorrect. Defective part Check description Corrective Action...
  • Page 679 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) The background is colored. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- 1. Check if the belt is bleached Increase the U140 MagDC value if the U140 fer belt unit on its surface.
  • Page 680 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (5) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Poor voltage applied for intermediate transfer belt cleaning. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. 3. Dirty separation brush. 4. Dirty fuser unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have 1.
  • Page 681 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if the phenomenon 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the fer belt unit appears at a pitch of the intermediate transfer belt by a soft cloth.
  • Page 682 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (7) Uneven transferring toner. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have 1. If paper dusts are accumulated, clean the fer belt unit accumulated at the proximity of pre-brush by removing the cleaning cover.
  • Page 683 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (8) Black or color dots appear on the image. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Flawed or dirty transfer belt. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. 3. Dirty Fuser unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check the intermediate transfer 1.
  • Page 684 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Image is blurred (Shifted transferring). Print example Cause of trouble 1. The paper used does not conform to the requirement. 2. Imbalanced fuser unit pressures. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1.

  • Page 685: The Leading Edge Of The Image Is Sporadically Misaligned With The Original

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Improperly adjusted leading edge timing. 2. Improper amount of slack of the original document in front of the registration. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Regist roller...

  • Page 686: Paper Is Wrinkled

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (12) Paper is wrinkled. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper-width guides Check the paper-width guides If the width adjuster cursors are not flush with are flush with the paper. paper, set them correctly. Paper 1. Check if paper is curled or 1.
  • Page 687 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (13) Offset occurs. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use range of specifications.
  • Page 688 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (14) Image is partly missing (Outlines objects and white dots). Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry 1. Check that the paper has moisture absorbed. place to store paper. 2.

  • Page 689: Fusing Is Loose

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (15) Fusing is loose. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use range of specifications.
  • Page 690 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (16) Image is out of focus. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. If the paper is damp, replace. 1. Check that the paper has moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper. 2. Check that the paper has 2.
  • Page 691 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (18) Dirty paper edges with toner. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Toner scattering due to an internal temperature increase.(Developer unit) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Conveying guide Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner, clean dirty with toner.
  • Page 692 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (19) Inferior color reproducibility. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace. moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper. Check that the paper has stored 2.
  • Page 693 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (20) Shifted colors. Print example Cause of trouble 1. False detection of the velocity of rotation of the transfer belt.(Noise) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Color Regist Check if U469 Color Regist If U469 Color Registration adjustment has not Adjustment Adjustment is performed after been done, perform U464 Calibration, then...

  • Page 694: Electric Problems

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-8 Electric problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement. Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. No electricity at the Measure the input voltage.
  • Page 695 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Middle motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. not operate tact in the connector. Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7) (45 ppm/55 ppm Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) model only).
  • Page 696 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Toner fan motor 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. 2 does not operate tact in the connector. Toner fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19) (45 ppm/55 ppm 2.
  • Page 697 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (15) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Eject fan motor 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. 2 does not operate tact in the connector. Eject fan motor 1, 2 and relay PWB (YC11) (45 ppm/55 ppm Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
  • Page 698 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (21) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Assist clutch 1, 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. does not operate tact in the connector. Assist clutch 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC10) (45 ppm/55 ppm Assist clutch 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC12)
  • Page 699 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (27) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Duplex clutch 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. does not operate tact in the connector. Duplex clutch 2 and relay PWB (YC7) (30 ppm/35 ppm Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
  • Page 700 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (32) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. on the cassette is tact in the connector. Paper length switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3) not displayed cor- Paper width switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
  • Page 701 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (36) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 (YC15) played when the Feed PWB 1 (YC4) and power source PWB (YC12)

  • Page 702: Mechanical Problems

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-9 Mechanical problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement. Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol. No primary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
  • Page 703 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Check if the rollers, pulleys and gears Grease the bushes and gears. Abnormal noise is operate smoothly. heard. Check if the following clutches are Check visually and remedy if necessary. installed correctly. Paper feed clutch 1, 2 Assist clutch 1, 2 Paper conveying clutch MP paper feed clutch...

  • Page 704: Send Error Code

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-10 Send error code This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions, preventive actions, as well as corrective actions. Error codes not described here could fall within software errors. If such an error is encountered, turn power off then on, and advise the service representative. (1) Scan to SMB error codes Code Contents...
  • Page 705 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Scan to FTP error codes Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 1101 FTP server does not exist on the net- 1. Check the FTP server name. work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters. 3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- nected.

  • Page 706: Scan To E-Mail Error Codes

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 2231 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters. failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- (FTPS communication) nected. 3101 FTP server responded with an error. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. 2.
  • Page 707 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 2202 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters. has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- (Timeout) nected. 2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. 3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an 1.

  • Page 708: Error Code

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 1-4-11 Error codes (1) Error code Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indica- tion, followed by five digits.) The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the detailed classification.
  • Page 709 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (2) Table of general classification Error code Description U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials. U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
  • Page 710 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Error code Description U04000/E04000 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num- ber was not registered in the destination unit. U04100/E04100 Subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress- based reception capability. U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti- nation unit.
  • Page 711 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B Error code Description U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit. U00431/E00431 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was not registered.

  • Page 712: U010Xx Error Code Table: G3 Transmission

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission Error code Description U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.

  • Page 713: U011Xx Error Code Table: G3 Reception

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception Error code Description U01100/E01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal. U01101/E01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS signal. U01102/E01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.

  • Page 714: U017Xx Error Code Table: V.34 Transmission

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission Error code Description U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). U01720/E01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange). U01721/E01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
  • Page 715 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-4-12 Printing System Troubleshooting (1) List of Erro Code Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective Causes Error code detection measures 1.Error 1020 is dis- Error occurs during Bridge Board error. Replace Bridge Board. Bridge Board mem- played. ory check. 2.Error 1030 is dis- Timeout for Printing system is not pow-...
  • Page 716 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective Causes Error code detection measures 9.“Fiery” is not Connection error of Defective DVI cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also shown on the MFP the DVI cable (dam- contact. check for continuity within the application.
  • Page 717 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective Causes Error code detection measures 9.“Fiery” is not Connection error of Wiring failure or loose con- Reinsert the connector. Also shown on the MFP the harness nection. check for continuity within the application. between the Main connector cable.
  • Page 718 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective Causes Error code detection measures 11.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board. possible with Com- board. error. mand Work Station. Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board. board.

  • Page 719: Precautions For Assembly And Disassembly

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5 Assembly and disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly (1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly.

  • Page 720: How To Tell A Genuine Kyocera Toner Container

    A black-colored band when seen through the left side window ( A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window ( The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera branded toner container, otherwise, it is a counterfeit.

  • Page 721: Outer Covers

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-2 Outer covers (1) Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover Procedure 1. Remove nine screws and then remove Rear upper the rear upper cover. cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-5-3 (2) Detaching and refitting the rear lower cover Procedure 2.

  • Page 722: Detaching And Refitting The Left Upper Cover

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Detaching and refitting the left upper cover Procedure 1. Remove four screws. Screw 2. Unhook two hooks and then remove the left upper cover. Left upper cover Screws Hooks Left upper cover Figure 1-5-5 1-5-4...

  • Page 723: Detaching And Refitting The Right Lower Cover

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the right lower cover Procedure 1. Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out completely. Strap 2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. 3. Open the right lower cover. 4. Remove the strap and then remove the right lower cover.
  • Page 724 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Detaching and refitting the right lower front cover Procedure 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Right lower front cover 2. Open the handle cover. 3. Remove three screws. 4. Unhook the hook and then remove the right lower front cover. Hook Screws Right lower...
  • Page 725 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover the right cover and DU cover assembly. Hooks Hook Hooks DU cover assembly Right cover Figure 1-5-10 (8) Detaching and refitting the right front cover Procedure Paper conveying unit 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Right front cover 2.
  • Page 726 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (9) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB cover and IH electric wire cover Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the IH electric wire cover rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3). 2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. 3.
  • Page 727 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (11)Detaching and refitting the ISU right cover and right upper cover Procedure Screws 1. Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover. ISU right 2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. cover Right upper cover 3. Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover.

  • Page 728: Detaching And Refitting The Left Cover

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (13)Detaching and refitting the left cover Procedure Transfer belt filters 1. Remove the left upper cover. (see page 1-5-4) 2. Remove the Toner filter. 3. Remove the left filter cover and the left filter. *: for 45 ppm/55 ppm model only 4.

  • Page 729: Paper Feed Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-3 Paper feed section (1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit Procedure Detaching remove the primary paper feed unit 1. Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out Strap completely. 2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. 3.
  • Page 730 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3). 6. Remove three screws and then remove the right lower rear cover. Right lower rear cover Screws Figure 1-5-18 Right lower 7. Open the handle cover. front cover 8.
  • Page 731 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 10. Release the two wire saddles. 11. Remove two connectors. Connector Wire saddles Connector Figure 1-5-20 12. Remove two screws each from primary Primary paper paper feed unit. feed unit 13. Remove the primary paper feed unit. Screws Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit...
  • Page 732 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Check or replace the primary paper feed unit and refit all the removed parts. *: When refit the primary paper feed unit, you must confirm the inserted pin to the Driving coupler driving coupler. 15. When the primary paper feed unit is Primary paper feed unit replaced,perform maintenance mode...
  • Page 733 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation pulley. [30 ppm model / 35 ppm model] Procedure 1. Remove the primary paper feed unit (see page 1-5-11). Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper Stop ring feed pulley 2.
  • Page 734 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Pull the primary paper feed shaft out Paper feed pulley Paper feed pulley from the forwarding pulley holder. 7. Remove the feed gear Z30H OW and Feed gear paper feed pulley. Feed gear Z30H OW Z30H OW *: To refit the feed gear Z30H OW, be sure to correctly align it with the paper feed pulley, so that the on-way clutches meet each other.
  • Page 735 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Detaching the separation pulley 9. Remove the spring. 10. Remove the retard holder from the pri- mary lower plate. Spring Hole Hole Primary lower plate Retard holder Figure 1-5-27 11. Remove the separation pulley from the Separation pulley retard holder. 12.

  • Page 736: Detaching And Refitting The Forwarding Pulley, Paper Feed Pulley And Separation Pulley. [45 Ppm Model / 55 Ppm Model]

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (3) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation pulley. [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model] Procedure 1. Pull the cassette 1 completely. 2. Pull up the cassette. Cassette Figure 1-5-29 3. Remove the cassette 2 in the same manner as above.
  • Page 737 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove the hook and remove the for- ward roller from the axle. 5. Remove the hook and remove the feed roller from the axle. Hook Paper feed pulley Forwarding pulley Figure 1-5-31 6. Unhook the two hooks and then remove the cover.
  • Page 738 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 7. Remove the hook and remove the sep- aration roller from the axle. *: Confirm that the nipping between the feed roller and separation roller is released. 8. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley, Hook paper feed pulley and separation pulley. 9.

  • Page 739: Detaching And Refitting The Mp Tray Paper Feed Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit Procedure 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. 2. Open the MP tray. Screws 3. Remove four screws. Screw Paper conveying MP tray unit Figure 1-5-34 4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover the right cover and DU cover assembly.
  • Page 740 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Remove two connectors. Connector 6. Release the wire saddle. 7. Remove the wire saddle. *: To refit the wire saddle, be sure to fit in the positioning hole that was previously used. Wire saddle Connector Installation hole Wire saddle Figure 1-5-36 8.
  • Page 741 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 9. Remove two screws. 10. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit. Screw MP tray paper feed unit Screw MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1-5-38 1-5-23...

  • Page 742: Detaching And Refitting The Mp Forwarding Pulley, Mp Paper Feed Pulley And Mp Separation Pulley

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley Procedure DU lower guide 1. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit (see page 1-5-21). Detaching forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley 2. Unhook three hooks and then remove Hooks the Du lower guide.
  • Page 743 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Unhook the hook of the feed holder Spring assembly. Hook 7. Remove the spring and the feed holder assembly from the top base. Feed holder assembly Top base Top base Spring Hook Figure 1-5-41 MP paper feed pulley Oneway gear 8.
  • Page 744 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 11. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the Pickup MFP shaft axis holes of feed MPF holder. MP forwarding pulley 12. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP for- warding pulley out from the pickup MFP shaft. Pickup gear Z30R Feed gear Z26H Axis hole Feed MPF holder...
  • Page 745 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Remove the spring. 15. Release the uniting of joint by sliding the retard holder assembly. Joint Retard holder assembly Spring Figure 1-5-45 16. Remove the retard holder assembly by turning it as shown. Retard holder assembly Figure 1-5-46 1-5-27...
  • Page 746 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. Remove two stop rings. Retard MPF shaft 18. Remove two bushes. 19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then remove the torque limiter and the MP Torque limiter separation pulley. MP separation 20. Clean or replace the MP forwarding pul- pulley ley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sepa- ration pulley.

  • Page 747: Optical Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 1-5-4 Optical section (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Notes on handling the LED mount assembly Do not touch the diffusion seat and the light guid- Diffusion seat LED mount assembly ing plate. Light guiding Use air blow when you clean the diffusion seat, plate the light guiding plate, and reflector.
  • Page 748 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 6. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-4). ISU rear cover Screw 7. Remove the right upper cover (see page 1-5-9). 8. Remove two screws and then remove Screw the ISU rear cover. Figure 1-5-50 9. Remove the platen. Platen 10.
  • Page 749 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 LED mount assembly 11. Move the LED mount assembly to the Cutting lack part cutting lack part. 12. Unhook the hook and remove the FFC cover from LED mount assembly. 13. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- tor. 14.

  • Page 750: Detaching And Refitting The Scanner Wires

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires NOTE When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below. Machine front: (P/N: 302H717381), gray Machine rear: (P/N: 302H717391), black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools (P/N 302FZ17100) Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811) Procedure 1.
  • Page 751 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 4. Remove the round terminals from the Round terminal scanner wire springs on scanner unit Round terminal left side. 5. Remove the scanner wire. Red-marked Red-marked Scanner wire spring Scanner wire spring Figure 1-5-55 Fitting the scanner wires 6. Remove two screws each from scanner wire drum..............(1) 7.
  • Page 752 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 11. Wind the inner scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the right of the scanner unit from below to above........................(6) 12. Wind the outer scanner wires around the outside grooves in the pulleys of the mirror frame 2 from above to below........................
  • Page 753 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 19. Refit the scanner wire drum with two screws. 20. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools. 21. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum, align the scanner wires to the inside. 22. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in posi- tion.

  • Page 754: Detaching And Refitting The Isu

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU Procedure Detaching the ISU Screws Screw 1. Worn the electrostatic prevention band Lens cover for the destruction prevention of the CCD board by static electricity. 2. Remove the Contact glass (see page 1- Screw 5-29).
  • Page 755 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Remove four screws and then remove [45ppm/55ppm] the ISU. *: The ISU's are different depending on 30ppm model/35ppm model and 45ppm model/55ppm model. Screw Screw Screw Screw [30ppm/35ppm] Screw Screw Screw Screw Figure 1-5-61 1-5-37...
  • Page 756 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Refitting the ISU 1. Install the FFT. *: The FFT should be inserted while hold- ing the position (A) shown in the illustra- tion (A). Do not apply a pressure to the focus adjuster. Figure 1-5-62 1-5-38...
  • Page 757 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 [45ppm/55ppm] 2. Decide the fix position of ISU by the fol- lowing. The right and left of machine: Verify the number prefixed by a (a) mark. Match the line (c) of ISU to the position- ing line (b) of same number on frame side.
  • Page 758 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Check the image After replacing the CCD unit, check the copy image. According to the condition, execute the procedures below. 1. In case of no problem on the image, go to “9.Image Adjustment” 2. In case a part of the image is whitish from the leading edge or the back- ground image appears like the illustra- tion “a”, go to “5.
  • Page 759 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 45/45,55/50 ppm model 1. For 45/45, 55/50 ppm model Set the spacer (large) (B) into the inside screw holes at the CCD sensor side. For 30/30, 35/35 ppm model Set the spacer (large) (B) into the out- side screw holes at the CCD sensor side.
  • Page 760 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2 In case of white vertical lines appear like the 45/45,55/50 ppm model illustration “b” on page 1. 1. For 45/45, 55/50 ppm model Set the spacer (large) (B) into the outside screw holes at the CCD sensor side. For 30/30, 35/35 ppm model Set the spacer (large) (B) into the inside screw holes at the CCD sensor side.

  • Page 761: Detaching And Refitting The Lsu

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the LSU Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see Transfer belt filters page 1-5-60). 2. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-72). 3. Remove the toner filter. 4. Remove the left filter cover and the left filter.
  • Page 762 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Remove two screws and then remove the middle feed plate and middle feed plate B. 11. Remove two LSU retainer pins and two springs. Springs LSU retainer pins Screw Middle feed plate B Screw Middle feed plate Figure 1-5-72 12.
  • Page 763 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Pull the LSU out from the body of the machine. Figure 1-5-74 15. Remove seven screws and then remove the LSU mount lid. Screws Screws Screws LSU mount lid Screw Figure 1-5-75 1-5-45...
  • Page 764 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 16. Remove the screw. 17. Unhook four hooks and then remove the LSU relay PWB cover. Screw Hooks LSU relay PWB cover Hooks Figure 1-5-76 18. Remove all the connectors and the FFC connectors with a lock. (30ppm model has the FFC connector without a lock.) *: When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock, removing it after...
  • Page 765 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 21. Remove the LSU retainer pins and the springs. 22. Remove two screws each and then remove the LSU front holder. Screw Spring LSU front holder Screw LSU retainer pin Figure 1-5-78 1-5-47...
  • Page 766 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 LSU (rear side) LSU (front side) 23. Wrap an antistatic discharging belt Support around your wrist to prevent damage to portions the LSU. *: Do not touch terminals and FFC con- tacts in the APC PWB of the LSU. 24.

  • Page 767: Color Registration Adjustment

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (5) Color registration adjustment Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit. Procedure 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance], [Calibration] and then [Start]. Calibration begins. Auto correction 3. Press [Color Registration], [Auto] and then [Start]. A chart is printed. 4.
  • Page 768 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 8. Press [Chart] and [Print] to print a chart. 9. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A. If they are within the range, proceed to step 10. If scales are out of range, repeat steps 6 through 9.
  • Page 769 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 12. Open the front cover and then pull out the waste toner box tray (see page 1-5-55). 13. Rotate the adjustment knob using a 5 mm hex wrench. Direction of rotation (V-1 - V-5) >= 2 scales (sample 1): rotate counterclockwise. (V-1 - V-5) <= -2 scales (sample 2): rotate clockwise.
  • Page 770 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) LSU squareness adjustment Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit. <confirmation > <Test copy> 1. Execute the light axis adjustment using the maintenance mode U034 (paper timing data settings). 2. Print 5 test copies. (From any of the paper sources) In the direction of paper travel *Measure the difference of AA' from...
  • Page 771 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 3. Loosen the two screws, position the Adjustment bracket alignment board and the LSU fixing mount so that they are exactly aligned, and fix the two screws. The scale posi- tion should be determined depending on the amount of shifts sight-checked in step 2 of the section Confirmation above.
  • Page 772 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Amount of adjustment changes (reference) Amount of image shifts Scale Scale position position Farthest left (about 1.5mm) 0.67 0.53 Right side up 0.40 0.27 0.13 Reference value 0.13 -0.2 0.27 -0.4 0.40 -0.6 Left side up 0.53 -0.8 0.67 -1.0 Farthest right (about 1.5mm)

  • Page 773: Image Formation Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 1-5-5 Image formation section (1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit Procedure 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove all toner container each. 3. Remove the waste toner box tray by lift- Waste toner box tray ing upwards and from the right side. Figure 1-5-91 4.
  • Page 774 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Release the lock by pushing the fixed levers at the right and left of inner unit. Inner unit 8. Remove the inner unit. Fixed lever Figure 1-5-93 1-5-56...

  • Page 775: Detaching And Refitting The Developer Unit And Drum Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit Detaching example: Developer unit Y and Drum unit Y Connectors Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 68). 2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see Toner supply shutter page 1-5-62).
  • Page 776 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 8. Remove the drum unit from the devel- oper unit. 9. Check or replace the drum unit and the developer unit and refit all the removed parts. *: When a new development unit is installed, the developing roller protec- Developer roller tive sheet must be removed.

  • Page 777: Detaching And Refitting The Charger Roller Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit Detaching example: Charger roller unit Y Procedure 1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5- 55). 2. Pull out the charger roller unit by pick- ing and releasing the MC lock lever. 3.

  • Page 778: Transfer Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-6 Transfer section (1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Procedure 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Paper conveying unit Right front cover 2. Remove three screws. 3. Unhook three hooks and then remove Screw the right front cover. Hook Hook Hook...
  • Page 779 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Remove four screws. Paper conveying unit 6. Remove the paper conveying unit by lifting upward. Screws Screws Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-101 1-5-61...

  • Page 780: Detaching And Refitting The Transfer Belt Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-5-60). 2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 68). 3. Remove the connector. Connector Figure 1-5-102 4. Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up both ends.
  • Page 781 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Remove the transfer belt unit. 6. Check or replace the transfer belt unit and refit all the removed parts. Transfer belt unit *: When refitting the new transfer belt unit, set the projected part aligned with the rail entrance. 7.
  • Page 782 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-62). 2. Unhook the front and back springs from the hooks. Spring Spring Transfer belt unit Figure 1-5-105 3. Unhook two hooks and then remove the cleaning cover.
  • Page 783 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove the cleaning pre brush by turn- Cleaning pre brush ing it as shown. 5. Check or replace the cleaning pre brush and refit all the removed parts. Figure 1-5-107 *: Hook the springs back in place onto the Spring cleaning pre brush when installing.

  • Page 784: Detaching And Refitting The Transfer Roller

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-109 2. Loosen two fixed screws on the TC Transfer roller (shaft) Bearing guide. Bearing Stop ring 3. Remove the stop ring. 4.
  • Page 785 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Check or replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts. *: When refitting the transfer roller, con- firm that the terminal of the ground plate is in contact with the ground plate in the frame. 8. When replacing the new transfer roller, proceed as follows: 1)Perform maintenance mode U127 (clearing the transfer counter) (see...

  • Page 786: Fuser Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-7 Fuser section (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. 2. Remove the screw and then the fuser wire cover. 3. Remove two connectors Connector Connector Fuser wire cover Screw Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-112 1-5-68...
  • Page 787 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove four screws (M4 × 10) and then remove the fuser unit. Fuser unit 5. Check or replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts. Screws (M4×10) 6. When replacing the new fuser unit, pro- ceed as follows: 1)Perform maintenance mode U167 (clearing the fuser count) (see page 1-3-112).
  • Page 788 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the Fuser IH PWB rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). 2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 68). 3. Remove the right upper cover (see page 1-5-96).
  • Page 789 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Remove two screws. 11. Unhook the hook by lifting up the fuser IH unit a little and then remove it. Fuser IH unit Screw Screw Hook Hook Fuser IH unit Figure 1-5-115 1-5-71...

  • Page 790: Detaching And Refitting The Main Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-8 PWBs (1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB Procedure Wire holder 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page Wire saddles 1-5-96). Wire saddles 2. Release seven wire saddles on the con- troller box. 3. Remove the wire holder. Wire saddle Wire saddles Controller box...
  • Page 791 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 4. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box. YC25 YC11 YC30 YC42 YC43(Connector type FFC) YC21(WH) YC22(WH) Controller box YC26(BK) Main PWB YC12 *: Before removing the connector type FFC YC43, unlock the lock by pressing the lock levers at both ends.
  • Page 792 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Main PWB 7. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB. YC23 YC27 YC32 YC8 (FFC connector with a lock) YC1 [BLACK] YC23 YC2 [BLUE] *: When removing the FFC from the FFC YC27 connector with a lock, remove the FFC BLACK YC32 after released by lifting down the lock...
  • Page 793 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Screws Wire holder 8. Release the wire saddle. 9. Remove two wire holders. 10. Remove two screws. Wire holder Fan mootor holder 11. Remove the fan motor holder. Controller box Wire saddle Figure 1-5-120 12. Remove seven screws from the main Screws PWB.
  • Page 794 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 13. Remove the main PWB by releasing the projection of ground plate in the net- work connector. Network connector 14. Check or replace the main PWB and refit all the removed parts. *: When replacing the main PWB, remove the following devices from the main PWB and then reattach it to the new main PWB.

  • Page 795: Remarks On Main Pwb Replacement

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (2) Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YC14) and DIMM (YS1,YS3) from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB. Main PWB EEPROM YC14 Figure 1-5-123 When refitting DIMM, Refit them to the original positions.
  • Page 796 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 3. Reset machine settings. ( Resets system menu settings modified at setup to their defaults.) If backup data is saved with the U917 maintenance mode, execute import of the backup data with the U917. Main items for settings [Date/Timer] - Date/Time settings [Date/Timer] - Timer settings (Sleep timer) [User/Job accounting] - Defaults for user authentication and job accounting only.
  • Page 797 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 When connecting the USB cables (YC21, YC22, YC26) to the PWB, connect to the connectors which the cable length match. (Connecting to any connector is satisfactory.) Main PWB YC21 YC26 YC22 Figure 1-5-126 1-5-79...

  • Page 798: Detaching And Refitting The Engine Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (3) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB Procedure 1. Remove the controller box (see page 1-5-72). 2. Remove twenty four connectors of fol- lowing from the engine PWB. YC1, YC2, YC3, YC4(Connector type FFC), YC5(Connector type FFC) YC6(Connector type FFC), YC7(Connector type FFC), YC10(Connector type FFC), YC26, YC9, YC8, YC46(Connector type FFC) YC47(FFC connector with a lock), YC11(Connector type FFC)*1 YC12(Connector type FFC), YC15, YC16, YC18, YC17, YC19, YC20, YC21, YC22, YC45...
  • Page 799 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 3. Remove six screws. 4. Remove the engine PWB. 5. Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts. *: When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB and then reattach it to the new engine PWB.

  • Page 800: Remarks On Engine Pwb Replacement

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB. Engine PWB EEPROM U100 Figure 1-5-129 1-5-82...
  • Page 801 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (5) Error symptom at an erroneous insertion of the engine PWB FFC If an FFC is inserted improperly, the following symptom could be observed: YC10 YC50 Figure 1-5-130 Engine Connect Occurrence 30 ppm / 35 ppm model 45ppm / 55 ppm model FEED1 [System error] (C0980) [System error] (C0980)
  • Page 802 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Note that the attention is required when disassembling the FFC cable of the printing system relay board. 1. When removing the FFC cable from the locked connector of the printing system relay board, unlock the connector by pressing the lock lever at the triangular mark.

  • Page 803: Detaching And Refitting The Power Source Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB Procedure Connector 1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). Connector 2. Release three wire saddles. 3. Remove three connectors. Connectors Wire saddle Wire saddle aire saddle Figure 1-5-132 4. Release six wire saddles. Wire saddle 5.
  • Page 804 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 7. Remove the connector from the coin vender plate. Connctor Coin vender plate Figure 1-5-134 8. Remove screw. 9. Remove cooling duct1. *For 45 ppm/55 ppm model only 10. Remove two screws. 11. Remove the power source assembly. Screw Screw Screw Power source...
  • Page 805 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-pin relay connector 12. Release wire saddle. Wire saddles 13. Remove 2-pin relay connector. 14. Remove screw. 15. Remove cooling duct2. 16. Remove eight screws. 17. Remove the power source PWB. 18. Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts. Screw Cooling duct2 Screws...

  • Page 806: Detaching And Refitting The High Voltage Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 Procedure 1. Remove the power source PWB (see page 1-5-85). 2. Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-106). 3. Remove five connectors from high volt- age PWB. High voltage PWB 1 Connectors YC18...
  • Page 807 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (8) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 Procedure 1. Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-106). 2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see page 1-5-62). 3. Remove two connectors from the high voltage PWB 2 assembly. High voltage PWB 2 assembly Connectors High voltage...

  • Page 808: Detaching And Refitting The Operation Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB Procedure 1. Remove the original cover or the docu- ISU front cover ment processor. ISU right cover Screws Pins 2. Remove two screws and then remove the ISU front cover. 3. Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover.
  • Page 809 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw operation panel cover. Operation panel cover Screw Screw Figure 1-5-143 1-5-91...
  • Page 810 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Screws 7. Remove two screws and then remove the USB wire (connector). USB wire (connector) Figure 1-5-144 Screws 8. Remove four screws. Screws Figure 1-5-145 1-5-92...
  • Page 811 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 9. Pull the operation panel unit upward. Operation panel unit 10. Release three wire saddles. 11. Remove four connectors from the oper- ation PWB. 12. Remove the operation panel unit. Waire saddles Connectors Operation Connector Operation panel unit Figure 1-5-146 13.
  • Page 812 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 14. Remove the connectors, two FFC and [State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching] the FPC from the operation PWB. *: To remove the FPC from the locked connector A, unlock the connector by raising the lock lever by 30 degrees. ( FPC: Flexible printed circuits ) 15.
  • Page 813 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 16. Remove six screws and then remove the operation PWB. Operation PWB Screws 17. Check or replace the operation PWB and refit all the removed parts. Screw Screw Figure 1-5-149 1-5-95...
  • Page 814 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (10)Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB Procedure 1. Remove nine screws and then remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-5-150 2. Remove nine screws. 3. Release two hanging parts and then Screw remove the rear lower cover.
  • Page 815 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 5. Remove two screws and then remove Screws the ISU right cover. 6. Remove the screw and five hooks and ISU right cover then remove the right upper cover. Right upper cover *: Unlatch the stoppers with the rear bot- tom one first.
  • Page 816 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 9. Remove four screws and the remove IH electric wire cover the fuser IH PWB cover. 10. Remove the IH electric wire cover. Screw Screws Screw Fuser IH PWB cover Figure 1-5-154 11. Release two wire saddles. 12. Remove four connectors from the fuser IH PWB.
  • Page 817 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 13. Remove two wire holders. 14. Remove the connector (YC27) from feed PWB 1. Connector (YC27) Feed PWB 1 Wire holder Wire holder Figure 1-5-156 15. Remove three screws. 16. Unhook two hooks and then remove IH IH box assembly box assembly.
  • Page 818 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 17. Remove two connectors. Screws 18. Remove six screws. 19. Unhook the hook of the PWB spacer and then remove the fuser IH PWB. Screws 20. Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and Connector refit all the removed parts. Screws Connector Fuser IH PWB...

  • Page 819: Drive Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-9 Drive section (1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY Procedure Detaching the drum drive unit K 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). 2.
  • Page 820 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Detaching the drum motor K 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). 2. Remove the connector. 3. Release the wire saddle. Connector Wire saddle Figure 1-5-161 4. Remove three screws. 5. Remove the drum motor unit K. Screw Screws Screw...
  • Page 821 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Detaching the drum drive unit MCY Steps 1 through 5 are for 45 and 55 ppm models. Connector For 30 and 35 ppm models, proceed to step 1. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-72). Screw 2. Remove the left cover (see page 1-5- 43).
  • Page 822 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 6. Release wire saddles. 30ppm model/35ppm model: 1 45ppm model/55ppm model: 2 7. Remove connectors. 30ppm model/35ppm model: 1 45ppm model/55ppm model: 3 Connector* Wire saddle* Connector Wire saddle *: 45 ppm model/55 ppm model only. Figure 1-5-166 8. Remove five screws and then remove (Shaft portion) the drum drive unit MCY.
  • Page 823 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Detaching the drum motor MCY Perform steps 1 through 5 of removing the drum drive unit MCY. 10. Release the wire saddle of the motor to remove. (See page -1-5-104.) *: For the drum moros M, C, and MCY only.

  • Page 824: Detaching And Refitting The Main Drive Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit Procedure 1. Remove the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY (see page 1-5- 101). 2. Release three wire saddles on the main drive unit. 3. Remove two connectors. Main drive unit Connector Wire saddle...
  • Page 825 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-2 (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit Procedure Feed PWB 1 Detaching the fuser drive unit assembly 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). 2.
  • Page 826 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 5. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- tor with a lock (YC4) on the engine PWB. Engine PWB Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- FFC connector tor with a lock (YC1) on the feed PWB with a lock (YC4) *: Before removing the connector type FFCs , unlock the lock by pressing the lock lever in its center.
  • Page 827 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 8. Remove the connector. 9. Remove three screws. 10. Remove the fuser drive unit. Fuser drive unit Screw Fuser drive unit Connector Screw Screw Figure 1-5-177 Detaching the transfer drive unit 11. Pull out the transfer belt unit a little (see page 1-5-62).
  • Page 828 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Detaching the feed drive unit 16. Remove three wire holders from the feed 2 FFC guide. Wire holder Feed 2 Wire holders FFC guide Figure 1-5-179 17. Remove two screws and then remove the feed 2 FFC guide. Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw...
  • Page 829 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 18. Remove the following nine connectors from the feed PWB 2. Feed PWB 2 YC10 YC11 YC11 YC13 YC12 Feed PWB 2 Figure 1-5-181 19. Remove three screws. Feed drive unit 20. Remove the feed drive unit. Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw...
  • Page 830 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 21. Check or replace the feed drive unit and refit all the removed parts. *: Connect the connector (yellow) to the Feed drive unit connector of paper feed clutch 1 on stamp [YELLOW] side as before, when removing the connector of the paper feed clutch as the check of the feed drive unit etc.
  • Page 831 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-96). 2. Remove the power source assembly (see page 1-5-85). 3. Remove the connector each. 4. Remove two screws each. 5.

  • Page 832: Detaching The Eject Filter

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1-5-10 Others (1) Detaching the eject filter Procedure 1. Unhook the hook each and remove two Eject filter units eject filter units. Eject filter 2. Remove the eject filter from the eject cover. 3. Clean or replace the eject filter and refit the filter.
  • Page 833 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter and left filter [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model] Procedure Toner filter 1. Remove the toner filter unit while grip- Toner filter unit * ping the levers. 2. Clean or replace the toner filter unit and refit the filter.
  • Page 834 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter Procedure 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the fan filter by releasing the lever. 3. Clean the fan filter. 4. Refit the fan filter. Front cover Fan filter Lever Fan filter Figure 1-5-187 1-5-116...
  • Page 835 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filter Procedure 1. Remove two transfer belt filters by Lever releasing the lever. Transfer belt filter 2. Clean the transfer belt filter. Lever 3. Refit the transfer belt filter. Transfer belt filters Figure 1-5-188 1-5-117...
  • Page 836 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (5) Detaching and refitting the developer filter [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model] Procedure 1. Remove the developer filter cover by releasing the lever. 2. Remove the developer filter. 3. Clean the developer filter and refit the Lever filter.

  • Page 837: Detaching And Refitting The Hard Disk Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (6) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit Procedure 1. Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup data reading) (see page 1-3- 226). 2. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-96). 3. Release the wire saddle. 4. Remove two screws. Screws Wire saddle Figure 1-5-190...
  • Page 838 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 6. Remove two connectors from the hard disk unit while pushing the lock lever. Number of hard disk unit equipment Black Hard disk unit Lever Lever Connector Connector Figure 1-5-192 7. Remove four pins and then remove the HDD bracket hard disk unit from the HDD bracket.

  • Page 839: Detaching And Refitting The Eject Unit

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Detaching and refitting the eject unit Procedure 1. Remove the right upper cover (see Connector page 1-5-97). 2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 68). 3. Remove the connector. 4. Remove two screws and then remove the eject unit. 5.

  • Page 840: Direction Of Installing The Principal Fan Motors

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (8) Direction of installing the principal fan motors When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust). Fuser edge fan motor 2 Fuser fan motor 2 Eject front fan motor Developer fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) (Rating label:inside) (Rating label:inside)
  • Page 841 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (9) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment At the paper feed source which a sheet of wrinkled paper has caused, check how the paper is fed askew. Run U051 to reduce the curvature of paper at the regist roller and measure how the paper is fed askew. 1.
  • Page 842 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Screw Screw Paper width guide Cassette Paper width guide Screw Screw If the B-A is negative, If the B-A is positive, rotate clockwise rotate counter-clockwise. The skew feed Paper width guide adjustment screw Paper width guide Figure 1-5-198 1-5-124...

  • Page 843: Upgrading The Firmware

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 1-6 Upgrading the firmware 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, operation PWB, engine PWB, ISC PWB, fuser IH PWB, motor control PWB, optional language, color table and optional devices. * : Firmware upgrade must be preceded by an authentication using U025 if the security level is set to Very High.
  • Page 844 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-6 Emergency-UPDATE If Safe Update is processed to the end, the firmware update is complete. In FW-Update case the message below is indicated, update the firmware after recovery with Error FFFF the steps below. Note that this is unoperable when the device is operating normally. Preparation The USB flash device must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance.

  • Page 845: Paper Feed/Conveying Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1 Mechanical Construction 2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed paper to the transfer/separation section.
  • Page 846 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 FEED_MOT_DIR YC2-2 FEED_MOT_RDY YC2-3 FEED_MOT_CLK YC2-4 FEED_MOT_REM YC2-5 ASIST_CL1 YC10-1 FEED_CL1_REM ASCL1* YC4-1 PFCL1 CAS1_P0_SENS YC8-11 CAS1_EMPTY_SENS YC8-6 CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS YC8-9 PCCL LIFT_MOT1_- YC3-13 LIFT_MOT1_+ YC3-14 PGS1(U) CAS1_QUANT1 YC3-19 PGS1(L) CAS1_QUANT2 YC3-22 ASCL2* PFCL2 CAS2_P0_SENS YC8-23 CAS2_EMPTY_SENS YC8-18 CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS YC8-21 LIFT_MOT2_- YC3-15 LIFT_MOT2_+...

  • Page 847: Mp Tray Paper Feed Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) MP tray paper feed section Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sep- aration pulley. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque lim- iter.
  • Page 848 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 RYPWB MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPLS1 YC3-5 MPF_PPR_SET MPPS YC3-3 MPF_CL_REM YC3-13 PFCL MPPLSW MPTSW MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPLS2 YC3-8 MPPWSW MPF_JAM_SENS MPFS YC3-11 MPF_LIFT_DR_B YC3-16 MPLM MPF_LIFT_DR_A YC3-15 MPF_WID1 YC2-7 MPF_WID2 YC2-5 MPF_WID3 YC2-4 MPF_LNG YC2-2 MPF_TABLE YC2-9 YC12 YC17 FPWB1 EPWB Figure 2-1-4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 2-1-4...

  • Page 849: Paper Conveying Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (3) Paper conveying section The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cas- sette or MP tray, or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller.
  • Page 850 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 FPWB2 REG_CL_REM YC22-2 REG_SENS YC7-12 FPWB1 FFED1_SENS YC7-9 MID_CL_REM YC7-14 FEED_MOT_DIR YC2-2 FEED_MOT_RDY YC2-3 FEED_MOT_CLK YC2-4 FEED_MOT_REM YC2-5 YC5-42 YC2-9 EPWB Figure 2-1-6 Paper conveying section block diagram (30 ppm/35 ppm model) 2-1-6...
  • Page 851 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 REG_MOT_B/ YC25-1 FPWB2 REG_MOT_A/ YC25-2 REG_MOT_B YC25-3 REG_MOT_A YC25-4 REG_SENS YC7-12 FFED1_SENS YC7-9 FPWB1 MID_B/ YC7-1 MID_A/ YC7-2 MID_B YC7-3 MID_A YC7-4 FEED_MOT_DIR YC2-2 FEED_MOT_RDY YC2-3 FEED_MOT_CLK YC2-4 FEED_MOT_REM YC2-5 YC5-42 YC2-9 EPWB Figure 2-1-7 Paper conveying section block diagram (45 ppm/55 ppm model) 2-1-7...

  • Page 852: Drum Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-2 Drum section The drum section consists of the charger roller unit, drum and cleaning section. The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer.
  • Page 853 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 HVPWB1 Drum Drum Drum Drum unit Y unit C unit M unit K CL-Y CL-C CL-M CL-K DRPWB-Y DRPWB-C DRPWB-M DRPWB-K EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM FRPWB EPWB MCPWB DRM-M DRM-C DRM-K -MCY *1 30ppm/35ppm model [45ppm/55ppm model only] *2 45ppm/55ppm model Figure 2-1-9 Drum section block diagram 2-1-9...

  • Page 854: Developer Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-3 Developer section The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush, the magnet roller, the devel- oper blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Also, the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not toner remains in the developer unit.
  • Page 855 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 HVPWB VM-Y VM-C VM-M VM-K Developer Developer Developer Developer unit Y unit C unit M unit K TS-Y TS-C TS-M TS-K FRPWB EPWB MCPWB DEVM-K DRM-MCY Figure 2-1-11 Developer section block diagram 2-1-11...

  • Page 856: Image Scanner Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-4 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for print- ing. (1) Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the LED lamp and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) via the three mirrors and ISU lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
  • Page 857 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Original ODSW LLPWB CCDPWB Lens image sensor Image scanner unit ISCPWB MPWB Figure 2-1-13 Image scanner section block diagram 2-1-13...

  • Page 858: Laser Scanner Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Laser scanner section The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the drum surface.
  • Page 859 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 PDPWB-K BD_Bk YC3-2 YC1-9 LSU_TH_Bk YC3-3 YC1-8 DATA_1N_Bk YC3-9 YC1-2 PWB-K Laser DATA_1P_Bk YC3-10 YC1-1 scanner unit K P_REM_Bk YC4-3 P_LOCK_Bk PM-K YC4-4 P_CLK_Bk YC4-5 PDPWB-M LSU_TH_M YC5-2 YC1-9 LDD_CS_M YC5-3 YC1-8 DATA_1N_M YC5-9 YC1-2 PWB-M Laser DATA_1P_M YC5-10 YC1-1 scanner unit M...
  • Page 860 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 BD_Bk YC5-2 YC1-29 PDPWB-K LSU_TH_Bk YC5-3 YC1-28 LDD_CS_Bk YC5-9 YC1-22 DATA_1N_Bk YC5-25 YC1-6 PWB-K Laser DATA_1P_Bk YC5-26 YC1-5 scanner DATA_2N_Bk YC5-28 YC1-3 unit K DATA_2P_Bk YC1-2 YC5-29 P_REM_Bk YC4-3 P_LOCK_Bk PM-K YC4-4 P_CLK_Bk YC4-5 BD_M YC8-2 YC1-29 PDPWB-M LSU_TH_M YC8-3 YC1-28 LDD_CS_M...

  • Page 861: Transfer/Separation Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section The transfer/separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer roller section. (1) Intermediate transfer unit section The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt, and the four pri- mary transfer rollers for respective color drums, and forms a full-color toner image by superimposing and transferring single-color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt.
  • Page 862 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 HVPWB2 Transfer belt unit TRSS TRES TRPWB TRBLS TRCM TRSM EPWB REG_SENS_F_P YC10-6 IDS1 REG_SENS_F_S YC10-7 REG_SENS_R_P YC10-11 IDS2 REG_SENS_R_S YC10-12 CLN_SOL_REM YC10-14 CLSOL FPWB1 CLN_SOL_RET YC10-15 TRANS_MOT_BRK YC13-1 TRANS_MOT_DIR YC13-2 TRANS_MOT_RDY YC13-3 TRANS_MOT_CLK YC13-4 TRANS_MOT_REM YC13-5 Figure 2-1-18 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram 2-1-18...

  • Page 863: Secondary Transfer Roller Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (2) Secondary transfer roller section The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying unit and the separation brush. To the secondary transfer roller, DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2).
  • Page 864 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 EPWB HVPWB2 Separation brush T2_OFF_REM Separation bias YC1-8 YC8-5 T_REM Secondary transfer bias YC1-7 YC8-6 TRRS Secondary transfer roller TRRM FPWB1 PRESS_RLS _MOT_REM1 YC1-16 YC6-49 PRESS_RLS _MOT_REM2 YC1-15 YC6-50 PRESS_ RLS_SENS YC1-14 YC6-51 RYPWB YC14 Figure 2-1-20 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram 2-1-20...
  • Page 865 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-6 Fuser section The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller. The heat roller (fuser belt) is heated by the fuser IH (FIH), and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring.
  • Page 866 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 PRESS_TH YC26-B9 FSR_SIZE_SENS FUES YC26-A13 Fuser unit FSR_RLS_DR_CW YC26-A11 FURM FSR_RLS_DR_CCW YC26-A10 FSR_RLS_SENS YC26-A16 FURS COIL_LIVE FTH4 EPWB FIHPWB COIL_COM YC10 YC26 +15V1 YC6-1 +15V2 YC6-2 FTH3 FTH2 FTH1 FSR_BLT_PLS FUBLS YC26-A19 MAIN_TH1,2 YC26-B16,17 YC1-5,6 GUIDE_TH YC26-B15 YC1-7 EDGE_TH FUPWB YC1-9 YC26-B11...

  • Page 867: Eject/Feedshift Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section The paper eject/feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the fuser section to the top tray, duplex conveying section or job separator. Figure 2-1-23 Eject/Feed shift section 1. Middle pulley 8.
  • Page 868 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 JUNC_SOL_KYU YC5-19 FSSOL JUNC_SOL_FUK YC5-20 EXIT_FEED_SENS YC5-13 EXIT_PAPER_SENS YC5-16 FRPWB SB_MOT_B/ YC5-8 SB_MOT_A/ YC5-9 SB_MOT_B YC5-10 SB_MOT_A YC5-11 EPWB Figure 2-1-24 Eject/Feed shift section block diagram 2-1-24...

  • Page 869: Duplex Conveying Section

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-1-8 Duplex conveying section The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject/feedshift section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing. Figure 2-1-25 Duplex conveying section 1. Upper duplex roller 6. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) 2.
  • Page 870 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1 YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2 DU_CL_UPPER_REM DUCL1 YC23-4 YC13-9 YC11-9 FPWB1 RYPWB DU_SENS DUS2 YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2 DU_CL2_REM DUCL2 YC14-12 YC1-7 YC7-2 EPWB Figure 2-1-26 Duplex conveying section block diagram (30 ppm/35 ppm model) 2-1-26...
  • Page 871 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1 YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2 DU1_B/ YC23-6 YC13-7 YC16-1 DU1_A/ YC23-7 YC13-6 YC16-2 DU1_B DUM1 YC23-8 YC13-5 YC16-3 DU1_A YC23-9 YC13-4 YC16-4 FPWB1 RYPWB DU_SENS DUS2 YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2 DU2_B/ YC14-14 YC1-5 YC7-5 DU2_A/ YC14-15 YC1-4 YC7-6 DU2_B DUM2 YC14-16 YC1-3 YC7-7...
  • Page 872 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 This page is intentionally left blank. 2-1-28...

  • Page 873: Electrical Parts Layout

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout (1) PWBs Laser scanner unit Image scanner unit Developer unit Conveying unit Fuser unit Machine front Machine inside Drum unit Machine rear Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 2-2-1...
  • Page 874 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1. Main PWB (MPWB) ......Controls the software such as the print data processing and provides the interface with computers. 2. Engine PWB (EPWB)......Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output con- trol, paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature con- trol, etc.
  • Page 875 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 List of correspondences of PWB names Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Main PWB (MPWB) PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP Engine PWB (EPWB) PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP Power source PWB (PSPWB) PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2)

  • Page 876: Switches And Sensors

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (2) Switches and sensors Laser scanner unit Image scanner unit Conveying unit Developer unit Fuser unit Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Drum unit Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 2-2-4...
  • Page 877 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 1. Main power switch (MSW) ....Turns ON/OFF the AC power source. 2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....Detects the opening and closing of the front cover. 3. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) ......Detects the presence of paper (cassette 1). 4.
  • Page 878 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 53. Eject full sensor (EFS) ......Detects a paper misfeed in the eject section. Detects when the inner tray is full. 54. Switchback sensor (SBS) ..... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject and switchback sections. 55. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) ....... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section. 56.
  • Page 879 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (3) Motors Laser scanner unit Image scanner unit Conveying unit Developer unit Fuser unit Machine front Machine inside Drum unit Machine rear Figure 2-2-3 Motors 2-2-7...
  • Page 880 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 1. Paper feed motor (PFM) ....... Drives the paper feed section. 2. Lift motor 1 (LM1)........Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1). 3. Lift motor 2 (LM2)........Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2). 4. MP lift motor (MPLM) ......Operates the MP plate. 5.

  • Page 881: Fan Motors

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (4) Fan motors Laser scanner unit Image scanner unit Developer unit Conveying unit Fuser unit Machine front Machine inside Drum unit Machine rear Figure 2-2-4 Motors 2-2-9...
  • Page 882 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 1. Toner fan motor 1 (TFM1)*....Cools the toner container section. 2. Toner fan motor 2 (TFM2)*....Cools the toner container section. 3. Developer fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) ..Cools the developer section. 4. Developer fan motor 2 (DEVFM2) ..Cools the developer section. 5.
  • Page 883 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 (5) Others Laser scanner unit Image scanner unit Conveying unit Developer unit Fuser unit Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Drum unit Figure 2-2-5 Others 1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ....Primary paper feed from cassette 1. 2. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ....Primary paper feed from cassette 2. 3.
  • Page 884 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 10. Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2) ....Controls the drive of duplex section. 11. Speaker (SPK) ........Generates an error sound. 12. Touch panel (TPL)......... Operates the operation panel. 13. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)....Controls the feedshift guide. 14. Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) ....Controls the ID sensor cleaning. 15.
  • Page 885 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Main PWB YC25 YC12 BAT1 YC31 YC11 YC30 YC23 YC10 YC33 YC27 BLACK YC32 BLUE YC43 YC42 YC21 YC26 YC22 YC20 Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-1...
  • Page 886 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to HDD1 data signal hard disk 1 HDD1 data signal Ground HDD1 data signal HDD1 data signal Ground Ground Connected to HDD2 data signal hard disk 2 HDD2 data signal :45ppm/ Ground 55ppm HDD2 data signal model only) HDD2 data signal...
  • Page 887 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description KMDET 0/3.3 V DC KMAS set signal Connected to Not used KMAS KMDREQ 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal KMACK 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal KMRXD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS received data signal SGND Ground KMTXD...
  • Page 888 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 DP_CONECTN 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal DP_SYSCLKOUT Connected to 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal DP relay PCIEN3_DP2A 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground PCIEP3_DP2A 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground Ground PCIEN_REFCLK...
  • Page 889 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 Ground Connected to Ground DP relay Ground PCIEN0_DPA2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground PCIEN0_DPA2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground Ground PCIEN0_A2DP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground PCIEP0_A2DP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal...
  • Page 890 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 BEEP_POWERO Sleep return signal 0/3.3 V DC Connected to LED_MEMORY_N 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal operation LED_ATTENTION 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal PWB 1 LED_PROCESSI 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal NG_N AUDIO Analog...
  • Page 891 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC25 Ground Connected to HTPDN 0/3.3 V DC Control signal ISC PWB LOCKN 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal Ground RX0N 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal RX0P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal Ground YC26 VBUS...
  • Page 892 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC32 Ground Connected to +5V_HDD 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD2 hard disk 2 Ground :45 ppm/ 55 ppm model only) YC33 SGND Ground Connected to SDOCLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal fiery relay 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal SGND...
  • Page 893 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC43 HSYNDD_P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Connect to HSYNDD_N 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal engine PWB HSYNCC_P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal HSYNCC_N 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal HSYNCB_P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal HSYNCB_N...

  • Page 894: Engine Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 2-3-2 Engine PWB 12 6 1 B19 YC23 YC22 YC25 YC26 YC20 YC19 YC21 YC24 YC13 U100 YC47 YC10 YC50 Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-10...
  • Page 895 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1 feed PWB 1 Ground 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground Ground 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1...
  • Page 896 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description ZIG_SENS 0/3.3 V DC TRSS: On/Off Connected to 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRSS transfer belt Ground unit BLT_SPEED 0/3.3 V DC TRBLS: On/Off 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRBLS TEMP Analog TEMP signal...
  • Page 897 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description CAS2_QUANT2 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off Connected to CAS2_QUANT1 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off feed PWB 2 CAS1_QUANT2 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off CAS1_QUANT1 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off LIFT_MOT1_LOC 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal LIFT_MOT2_LOC 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal...
  • Page 898 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to M_TEMP Not used feed PWB 1 LOOP_SENS 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off Ground EDGE_FAN_H 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off DU1_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal DU1_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal DU1_MOT_REM( 0/3.3 V DC DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off...
  • Page 899 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description DLP_CLR_CLK Not used Connected to DLP_CLR_RDY Not used feed PWB 1 DLP_CLR_DIR Not used Ground REG_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal REG_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal REG_MOT_REM( 0/3.3 V DC RM/RCL: On/Off Ground IH_FAN_L 0/24 V DC...
  • Page 900 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description FSR_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC FUM: On/Off Connected to FSR_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal feed PWB 1 FSR_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal FSR_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal FSR_MOT_BARK 0/3.3 V DC FUM brake signal Ground...
  • Page 901 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description PRESS_RLS_SE 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off Connected to DU_SENS 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off feed PWB 1 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used Ground CLN_SOL_RET 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET) CLN_SOL_REM 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT) REG_SENS_R_S Analog IDS2 detection signal...
  • Page 902 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description EXIT_FEED_SEN 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off Connected to SB_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off front PWB SB_MOT_PH 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal SB_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal SB_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal SB_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 903 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to Ground high voltage SP_CONT Analog Separation bias control voltage PWB 2 T2_CONT Analog Secondary transfer bias control volt- SP_OFF_REM 0/3.3 V DC Separation bias: On/Off T_REM 0/3.3 V DC Secondary transfer bias: On/Off FB_CNT 0/3.3 V DC Primary transfer cleaning bias: On/Off...
  • Page 904 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description MOT_DATA_SET 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal Connected to DRM_ON 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal motor con- BLT_FG Not used trol PWB YC10 Ground Connected to ECO_SENS 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K control signal front PWB ERS_Bk 0/24 V DC CL-K: On/Off...
  • Page 905 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 ERS_Y 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off Connected to DRM_INDEX_Y 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal front PWB FRONT_OPEN 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off Ground I2C_SCL 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal Ground I2C_SDA 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal Ground LSU_FAN_REM...
  • Page 906 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 DATA_3NBK(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) Connected to SGND Ground LSU relay DATA_2P_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) DATA_2N_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) Ground GAIN_FIX_M 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 907 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 EEPROM_CS_2_ 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal Connected to IDD_CS_2_BK 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal LSU relay EEPROM_CS_M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal IDD_CS_M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal EEPROM_CS_C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal IDD_CS_C...
  • Page 908 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 LOCK_M 0/3.3 V DC PM-M lock signal Connected to REM_M 0/24 V DC PM-M: On/Off LSU relay Ground DATA_1P_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) DATA_1N_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) Ground SDCLK_M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal...
  • Page 909 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 SDCLK_Y 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal Connected to Ground LSU relay PARA_SIG_P4_Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal PARA_SIG_P3_Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal CUALM_Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y alarm signal LSU_TH_Y Analog LSU thermistor Y detection signal...
  • Page 910 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 AC_MAG_CLK_C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C clock signal Connected to AC_MAG_CNT_C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C control voltage high voltage DISCHARGE_C Main charger C control signal PWB 1 AC_MAIN_CNT_ AC charger roller C control signal AC_SLV_CNT_C...
  • Page 911 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC17 AC_MAIN_CNT_ AC charger roller K control signal Connected to MAIN_IDC_Bk DC charger roller K control signal high voltage DC_MAIN_CNT_ DC charger roller K control signal PWB 1 Ground YC18 DF_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB clock signal Connected to DF_SDO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data...
  • Page 912 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC19 SIDE_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal (side) Connected to SIDE_SDO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data paper feeder/ signal (side) large capac- SIDE_SEL 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal (side) ity feeder, SIDE_SDI 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data...
  • Page 913 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC20 Ground Connected to EXIT_SENS 0/3.3 V DC BRES: On/Off bridge unit 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRES Not used BRIDGE2 _REM 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2: On/Off BRIDGE_ PH 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 control signal BRIDGE2_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM2 clock signal...
  • Page 914 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC23 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender Connected to SGND Ground coin vender SGND Ground MCV_ENBL 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender enable signal FGND Ground MCV_FEED_COU 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal MCV_EJ_COUNT 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal...
  • Page 915 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC26 EDGE_FAN_ALM 0/3.3 V DC FUEFM2 alarm signal Connected to Ground fuser unit and EDGE_FAN 0/24 V DC FUEFM2: On/Off fuser IH PWB EDGE_FAN_ALM 0/3.3 V DC FUEFM1 alarm signal Ground EDGE_FAN 0/24 V DC FUEFM1: On/Off FSR_FAN_ALM 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 916 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC26 B15 GUIDE_TH2 Analog FTH3 detection signal Connected to B16 MAIN_TH2 Analog FTH1 detection signal fuser unit and B17 MAIN_TH1 Analog FTH1 detection signal fuser IH PWB B18 GND Ground B19 +24V1 Not used B20 BRIDGE_FAN Not used YC27 Ground...
  • Page 917 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC46 G6_EG_SO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal G6_EG_IRN Connected to 0/3.3 V DC Engine interrupt signal main PWB JS_LED 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal ENG_OFF 0/3.3 V DC Engine off signal HLD_ENG 0/3.3 V DC Engine hold signal...
  • Page 918 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC47 Not used Connected to Not used fiery relay Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground CH1_N 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal CH1_P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground...
  • Page 919 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC47 HSYNC_BN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Connected to HSYNC_AP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal fiery relay HSYNC_AN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 2-3-35...

  • Page 920: Power Source Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-3 Power source PWB YC16 YC17 YC13 YC10 YC12 YC11 YC14 TB1 TB2 Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-36...
  • Page 921 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description LIVE 120 V AC AC power input 220-240 V AC Connected to NEUTRAL 120 V AC AC power input AC inlet and 220-240 V AC main power switch DH_LIVE 120 V AC AC power input 220-240 V AC LIVE_IN 120 V AC...
  • Page 922 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCPWB Connected to 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCPWB motor con- 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCPWB trol PWB Ground Ground...
  • Page 923 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC14 5 V DC 5V DC power to MPWB Connected to Ground main PWB 5 V DC 5V DC power to MPWB Ground 5 V DC 5V DC power to MPWB Ground 5 V DC 5V DC power to MPWB Ground 5 V DC...
  • Page 924 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 2-3-4 IH PWB (1) 120V model YC10 Figure 2-3-4 IH PWB (120V) silk-screen diagram 2-3-40...
  • Page 925 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Connector Signal Voltage Description AC_LIVE 120 V AC 120V AC power input AC_NEUTRAL 120 V AC 120V AC power input Connected to Inlet2 SGAND Ground Connected to 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB engine PWB IH_REM 0/3.3 V DC FIH: On/Off ROTATION...
  • Page 926 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) 220-240V model YC10 Figure 2-3-5 IH PWB (220-240V) silk-screen diagram 2-3-42...
  • Page 927 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Connector Signal Voltage Description LIVE 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC power input NEUTRAL 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC power input Connected to Power source PWB SGAND Ground Connected to 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB engine PWB IH_REM 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 928 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-5 ISC PWB YC14 Figure 2-3-6 ISC PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-44...
  • Page 929 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description SC_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal Connected to SC_SO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal main PWB SC_SI 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal SC_BSY 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal SC_HLDN 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal...
  • Page 930 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB Connected to Ground power source Ground Ground +24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB +24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB +3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to HPS...
  • Page 931 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to DIS_CIS_5N 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal CCD PWB DIS_CIS_5P 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground DIS_CISCKN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal DIS_CISCKP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground CCDSEL 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 932 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC13 Ground Connected to ORG_SW 0/3.3 V DC OSS: On/Off original size +5.1V 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OSS sensor YC14 +3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to ODSW Connected to Ground original CO_SW...

  • Page 933: Operation Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-6 Operation PWB 1 YC20 YC17 Figure 2-3-7 Operation PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 2-3-49...
  • Page 934 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB2 Connected to Not used operation INT_POWERKEY Power key: On/Off 0/3.3 V DC PWB2 Ground KEY6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 6 Not used LED3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive...
  • Page 935 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description PROCESSING Processing LED control signal 0/3.3 V DC Connected to JOB_LED JOBLED control signal 0/3.3 V DC operation PWB2 Analog Speaker sound signal (+) Connected to Analog Speaker sound signal (-) speaker BOTTOM Y+ Analog Touch panel Y+ position signal Connected to LEFT X-...
  • Page 936 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 B10 HUMAN_SENS_F Not used Connected to main PWB YC15 +5V6 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB Connected to +5V6 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB main PWB +5V6 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB Ground...
  • Page 937 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC20 Ground Connected to 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal Ground LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal...
  • Page 938 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC20 LCD control signal 0/3.3 V DC Connected to VCOM Analog LCD control signal VCOM Analog LCD control signal VCOM Analog LCD control signal 2-3-54...

  • Page 939: Front Pwb

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-7 Front PWB Figure 2-3-8 Front PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-55...
  • Page 940 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description +3.3V1 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB Connected to +3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB engine PWB 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB +24V 24 V DC 24 V DC power from EPWB +24V 24 V DC...
  • Page 941 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to EEP_SDA1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal engine PWB Ground TPD_Y_1 Analog DEVPWB-Y detection signal DLP_VCONT_Y_ 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-Y control signal TPD_TEMP_Y Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig- ERS_Y_REM 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off DRM_INDEX_ Y 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 942 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description JUNC_SOL_RET 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET) Connected to Ground engine PWB EXIT_PAPER_SE 0/3.3 V DC EFS: On/Off EXIT_FEED_SEN 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off SB_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off SB_MOT_PH 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal SB_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal SB_MOT_PD...
  • Page 943 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description ENCODE_M Not used Connected to ENCODE_C Not used engine PWB ENCODE_Y Not used THOP_ Bk Not used THOP_M Not used THOP_C Not used THOP_Y Not used Ground Not used Connected to LED1 Not used fuser front Not used fan motor LED2...
  • Page 944 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FSSOL Connected to JUNC_SOL_KYU 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT) eject unit JUNC_SOL_FUK 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET) 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM2 Connected to DLP_FAN_Bk 0/24 V DC...
  • Page 945 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description DLP_ADR1_BK Not used Connected to DLP_ADR0_BK Not used developer EEP_SDA1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal unit K EEP_SCL1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to TS-K 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to VM-K VIB_MOT...
  • Page 946 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC13 TPD_TEMP_C Analog Developer thermistor C detection sig- Connected to DLP_VCONT_C_ 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-C control signal developer unit C TPD_C_1 Analog DEVPWB-C detection signal TN_CLK_C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground DLP_ADR1_C Not used DLP_ADR0_C Not used EEP_SDA1...
  • Page 947 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 Connected to front cover switch, LSU fan motor and waste FRONT_OPEN 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off toner motor Ground 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM LSU_FAN_OUT DC0V/24V LSUFM: On/Off CL_MOT1 DC0V/24V WTM: On/Off CL_MOT2 24 V DC...
  • Page 948 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-8 Feed PWB 1 YC16 YC12 YC10 YC19 YC18 YC17 YC14 YC13 Figure 2-3-9 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 2-3-64...
  • Page 949 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to REG_F_LED Analog IDS1 control signal engine PWB REG_SENS_F_P Analog IDS1 detection signal REG_SENS_F_S Analog IDS1 detection signal Ground REG_R_LED Analog IDS2 control signal REG_SENS_RP( Analog IDS2 detection signal REG_SENS_RS( Analog IDS2 detection signal CLN_SOL_REM 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
  • Page 950 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description MPF_UP 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off Connected to MPF_PPR 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off engine PWB Ground MPF_LNG 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off MPF_WID3 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off MPF_WID2 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off MPF_WID1 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off...
  • Page 951 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to Not used engine PWB DRM_HEAT_REM Not used POWER_OFF 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal IH_PWB_FAN(L)_ 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal IH_PWB_FAN_H 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off IH_PWB_FAN_L Not used Ground REG_MOT_REM( 0/3.3 V DC RM/RCL: On/Off REG_MOT_CLK...
  • Page 952 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to DRM_MOT_BK_B Not used engine PWB DRM_MOT_BK_D Not used DRM_MOT_BK_R Not used DRM_MOT_BK_R Not used Ground TRANS_MOT_BR 0/3.3 V DC TRCM break signal TRANS_MOT_DI 0/3.3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal TRANS_MOT_RD 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal TRANS_MOT_CL 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal...
  • Page 953 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Connector Signal Voltage Description 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB Connected to 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB engine PWB Ground Ground 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EPWB Ground 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EPWB...
  • Page 954 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 IH_PWB_FAN 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off Connected to Ground IH fan motor IH_PWB_ALM 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal YC12 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2 Connected to 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2 feed PWB 2 5 V DC...
  • Page 955 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC14 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB Connected to DU_FAN Not used relay PWB DU_CL_LOWER_ 0/24 V DC DUCL2: On/Off DU_OPEN_SW 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off DU2_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU2_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse)
  • Page 956 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC17 MPF_WID1 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off Connected to MPF_TABLE 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off relay PWB Ground Ground YC18 FSR_MOT_BRK 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal Connected to FSR_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal fuser motor FSR_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 957 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC23 DU_ENTER_SEN 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off Connected to EXIT_FAN 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off relay PWB 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB DU_CL_UPPER_ 0/24 V DC DUCL1: On/Off Ground DU1_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal DU1_A/...
  • Page 958 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 2-3-9 Feed PWB 2 YC10 YC13 YC12 Figure 2-3-10 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram 2-3-74...
  • Page 959 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to FEED_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off engine PWB FEED_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal FEED_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal FEED_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal FEED_CL1_REM 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off FEED_CL2_REM...
  • Page 960 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description PICK_SOL1_RET 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (RET) Connected to PICK_SOL1_REM 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT) engine PWB CAS2_P0 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off CAS2_LIFT_UP 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off CAS2_EMPTY 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off PICK_SOL2_RET 0/24 V DC PUSOL2: On/Off (RET)
  • Page 961 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description LIFT_MOT1_- 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off Connected to LIFT_MOT1_+ 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off paper length LIFT_MOT2_- 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off switch 1/2, LIFT_MOT2_+ 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off paper width switch 1/2, lift LED_5V 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(U)
  • Page 962 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description MID_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal Connected to MID_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal middle MID_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal motor MID_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal middle sen- BEND_SENS...
  • Page 963 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to CAS2_LIFT_UP_ 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off primary SENS paper feed 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS2 unit CAS2_P0_SENS 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off Ground YC10 ASIST_CL1 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off Connected to 24V2...
  • Page 964 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-10 Relay PWB YC16 YC11 Figure 2-3-11 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-80...
  • Page 965 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Not used Connected to DU2_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal feed PWB 1 DU2_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU2_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU2_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU_OPEN_SW...
  • Page 966 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description LED_3.3V3 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW Connected to Ground MP tray unit MPF_PPR_SET 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off Ground MPF_LIFT_UP_S 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1 Ground MPF_LIFT_DOW 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 967 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 LOOP_SENS 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off Connected to Ground loop sensor 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LPS 3.3V Not used REG_BK_LED Not used Not used REG_BK_SENS1 Not used REG_BK_SENS1 Not used Not used BELT_JAM_SENS Not used...
  • Page 968 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 MPF_CL_REM 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off Connected to 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 feed PWB 1 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off MPF_LIFT_MOT_ 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off 24V2 Not used ID_SOL_ACT Not used...
  • Page 969 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 DU1_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal Connected to DU1_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal duplex motor DU1_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal and fuser DU1_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal fan motor 1/2...
  • Page 970 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-11 Motor control PWB Figure 2-3-12 Motor control PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-86...
  • Page 971 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground PGND Connected to Ground PGND power source Ground PGND 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB BLT_SPEED 0/3.3 V DC TBLS: On/Off...
  • Page 972 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description PGND Ground Connected to PGND Not used drum motor +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM-C +24V1 Not used (45ppm/ 55ppm model only) DRM_BK_CW/ 0/24 V DC DRM-K: On/Off Connected to DRM_M_CW/ 0/24 V DC DRM-M: On/Off drum motor...
  • Page 973 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 2-3-12 LSU relay PWB Figure 2-3-13 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-89...
  • Page 974 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB Connected to +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB power source PGND Ground PWB and PGND Ground engine PWB 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB...
  • Page 975 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description DATA_2N_Y(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) Connected to DATA_2P_Y(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) engine PWB SGND Ground INT_ST C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal PALA_SIG P0 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal PALA_SIG P1 C...
  • Page 976 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description INT_ST 2 Bk 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal Connected to INT_ST 1 Bk 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal engine PWB PALA_SIG P0 Bk 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal PALA_SIG P1 Bk 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal PALA_SIG P2 Bk 0/3.3 V DC...
  • Page 977 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description DATA_1N_C(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) Connected to DATA_1P_C(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) engine PWB SGND Ground REM C 0/24 V DC PM-C: On/Off LOCK C 0/3.3 V DC PM-C lock signal CLK C...
  • Page 978 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description SGND Ground Connected to REM Bk 0/24 V DC PM-K: On/Off engine PWB LOCK Bk 0/3.3 V DC PM-K lock signal CLK Bk 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PM-K Connected to PGND Ground...
  • Page 979 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description DATA_1PBk(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) Connected to SGND Ground APC PWB K DATA_2NBk(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) DATA_2PBk(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) SGND Ground 24 V DC...
  • Page 980 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description GAIN FIX M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal Connected to DATA_1N_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) APC PWB M DATA_1P_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) SGND Ground DATA_2N_M(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
  • Page 981 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 PALA_SIG P4 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal Connected to SDCLK C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal APC PWB C GAIN FIX C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal DATA_1N_C(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) DATA_1P_C(LVD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) SGND...
  • Page 982 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 PALA_SIG P1 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal Connected to PALA_SIG P2 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal APC PWB Y PALA_SIG P3 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal PALA_SIG P4 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal SDCLK Y...
  • Page 983 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 2-4 Appendixes 2-4-1 Appendixes (1) List of maintenance parts Maintenance part name Alternative Part No. part No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Paper feed pulley 45/55 ppm model PULLEY FEED 302N406030 2N406030 30/35 ppm model PULLEY FEED ASSY 302F906230 2F906230 Separation pulley...
  • Page 984 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Maintenance part name Alternative Part No. part No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list 45/55 ppm model PARTS IMAGE SCANNER H SP 302N493120 2N493120 30/35 ppm model PARTS IMAGE SCANNER L SP 302N693020 2N693020 Lower duplex roller 45/55 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP 302K994470 2K994470...
  • Page 985 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (2) Maintenance kits 30 ppm/35 ppm model Maintenance part name Alternative Parts No. part No. Name used in service Name used in parts list MK-8305A/Maintenance kit MK-8305A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702LK0UN0 072LK0UN (600,000 images) Drum unit K DK-8505 (K) Developer unit K DV-8305K Transfer belt unit TR-8505...
  • Page 986 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 45 ppm/55 ppm model Maintenance part name Alternative Parts No. part No. Name used in service Name used in parts list MK-8505A/Maintenance kit MK-8505A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702LC0UN0 072LC0UN (600,000 images) Drum unit K DK-8505 (K) Developer unit K DV-8505K Transfer belt unit TR-8505 Transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY...

  • Page 987: Periodic Maintenance Procedures

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 (3) Periodic maintenance procedures CH: Check, CL: Clean, AD: Adjust, LU: Lubrication, RE: Replace Periodic maintenance Maintenance User Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Test copy Perform at the Test copy and test maximum copy print size Periodic maintenance...
  • Page 988 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Drum Drum unit K Vacuum./ Replace: P.1-5-57 section MK-8305A/ MK8505A Drum unit C Vacuum./ Replace: P.1-5-57 MK-8305B/ MK8505B Drum unit M Vacuum./ Replace: P.1-5-57 MK-8305B/ MK8505B Drum unit Y Vacuum./ Replace: P.1-5-57...
  • Page 989 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 150/ 450/ 750/ 1050/ 1200 Paper Assist roller Clean with alcohol or a dry - /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL feed , cloth. convey- MP paper feed Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-21...
  • Page 990 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Scanner Contact glass DP slit glass: CL dry cloth Optical or alcohol wet cloth is section strictly prohibited. When installing DP, CL with dry cloth.Contact glass for original: CL alco- hol or dry cloth.(Face Side)
  • Page 991 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Driving, Fan filter Vacuum. 1pcs P.1-5-116 Other Developer filter* Vacuum. 1pcs P.1-5-118 Transfer belt filter Vacuum. 2pcs P.1-5-117 Toner filter* Replace: P.1-5-115 Left filter* MK-8305C/ MK8505C 2pcs Eject filter Replace:...
  • Page 992 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-7 (4) Image adjustment after replacing the maintenance kit Perform the following maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit (MK-8305A/ MK8505A, MK-8305B/ MK8505B, MK-8305C/ MK8505C): Executable using preset-settings of the U952 maintenance mode workflow (see page P.1-3-233). Maintenance kits Maintenance mode MK-A U119/ U930/ U140 / U469/ U127/ U464/ U469/ U412/ U464/...
  • Page 993 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-4 (5) Inner Cleaning 1. Cleaning the paper conveying plate Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit 2. Clean the side of the paper conveying Paper conveying plate plate, which paper runs through. * : Use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning. Figure 2-4-1 2.

  • Page 994: Repetitive Defects Gauge

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-5 (6) Repetitive defects gauge First occurrence of defect 37.5 mm/1 " Charger roller 39 mm/1 " Magnet roller 9/16 Sleeve roller 57 mm/2 " Right registration roller 63 mm/2 " Left registration roller 75 mm/2 " Transfer roller 15/16 94 mm/3 "...

  • Page 995: Firmware Environment Commands

    2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 (7) Firmware environment commands The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed per- manently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands. This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples. Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
  • Page 996 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-3 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Sleep timer time-out time Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240) 30 ppm:30 35 ppm:45 45 ppm/55 ppm:60 Ecoprint level 0: Off 2: On Default emulation mode 6: PCL 6 120V: 9 9: KPDL 220-240V: 6 Carriage-return action...
  • Page 997 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4-1 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Default paper size 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches) 2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches) 3: International DL (11 × 22 cm) 4: International C5 (16.2 × 22.9 cm) 5: Executive (7-1/4 ×...
  • Page 998 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting A4/letter equation 0: Off 1: On Host buffer size 0: 10 KB 1: 100 KB 2: 1024 KB Wide A4 0: Off 1: On Line spacing * Lines per inch (integer value) Lines per inch (decimal value) Character spacing * Characters per inch (integer value) Characters per inch (decimal value)
  • Page 999 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Default weight 0: Courier = darkness (courier and letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness 1: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = darkness 4: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = regular 5: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = regular Color mode 0: Black &...
  • Page 1000 2L6/2N6/2N5/2N4 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Paper type for optional cassettes 1: Plain 3 to 7 3: Preprinted 5: Bond 6: Recycled 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 17: High quality 21 to 28: Custom1 to 8 PCL paper source 0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si.

This manual is also suitable for:

Taskalfa 3551ciTaskalfa 4551ciTaskalfa 5551ci

Table of Contents